GOT1000 Handbook

INTRODUCTION
This GOT1000 Series Handbook describes the basic information about the GOT1000 series of MITSUBISHI Graphic Operation Terminals (hereinafter abbreviated as GOT), the information required for the GOT installation, and also others. For more details, refer to the manuals shown in this handbook.
HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK

Be sure to use this handbook together with the following catalogs and manuals.
Catalog
The following catalog describes the information about new functions, the product lineup, the cost, and others.
A version of the catalog corresponds to this handbook L(NA)08054-C 0707(MDOC)
Manuals related to the GOT1000 series

The manuals describe the detailed information for the GOT. For details of the information shown in this handbook, refer to the related manuals of the GOT1000 series. The manuals related to the GOT1000 series can be downloaded at the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE website (http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/ index.html).
A-1
MANUALS
For details of the connection configuration and software operation/installation, refer to the following manuals.
For details about the GOT hardware

GT15 User's Manual GT11 User's Manual GT10 User's Manual Handy GOT User's Manual SH-080528ENG (1D7M23) JY997D17501 (09R815) JY997D24701 (09R819) JY997D20101 (09R817)
For details about screen configurations, functions, and the usage of GT SoftGOT1000
GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual SH-080602ENG (1D7M48)
For details about the installation operation, basic operation of screen design, and data transfer operation of GT Designer2
GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (For GOT1000 Series) SH-080529ENG (1D7M24)
For details about screen configurations, functions, and the usage of GT Simulator2
GT Simulator2 Version2 Operating Manual SH-080546ENG (1D7M34)
For details about the specifications and setting methods of object functions
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) SH-080530ENG (1D7M25)
For details about the connection configurations and cable fabrication

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual SH-080532ENG (1D7M26)
For details about the extended functions and option functions

GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual SH-080544ENG (1D7M32)
For details about the specifications, system configurations, and setting methods of the gateway function
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual SH-080545ENG (1D7M33)
For details about the specifications, system configurations, and setting methods of the MES interface function
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual SH-080654ENG (1D7M63)
A-2
NEWLY ADDED FUNCTIONS

The following shows newly added functions. (As of end of January 2007)
New models
The GT15 medium size, high resolution model (GT1555-VTBD) The same functions as the large models are available in a small installation space. GT15 User's Manual The GT11 bus connection dedicated models (GT1155-QTBDQ/A, GT1155-QSBDQ/A, GT1150-QLBDQ/A) The bus connection is available on GT11. GT11 User's Manual The 4.5" type GT10 models (GT1030-LBD/LBD2, GT1030-LBDW/LBDW2) Two-point press is available with a matrix type touch panel. GT10 User's Manual The GT10 white backlight models (GT1030-LBDW/LBDW2, GT1020-LBDW/LBDW2/ LBLW) The backlight type can be selected according to the use environment. GT10 User's Manual
Connection to PC CPU modules

GT SoftGOT1000 can be used with PC CPU modules. GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual
New optional units

External I/O unit The external I/O function is available. Sound output unit The sound output function is available.
GOT enhanced by new functions

Operator authentication for changing security levels The function authenticates users using the operator name and password that correspond to a security level.
Product A Screw tightening torque setting
Login OK
Torque 1
100
Torque 2
300
Operator change
Torque 3
The set value, Torque 3, is not operable.
Login screen is displayed when starting up GOT. Enter operator name and password.
After logging in, the screen changes so that operation can start.
The screen display and touch switches depends on the level of the logged-in operator.
A-3
External I/O function The external I/O unit enables connection to external I/O device (e.g. lamps, relays).
Control panel Mitsubishi PLC
Q25HCPU
Q61P-A1 POWER MODE RUN ERR USER BAT BOOT
MAN
AUTO
Output
PULL
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
RUN T.PASS SD ERR MNG D.LINK RD ERR
QJ71BR11
MAN
AUTO
USB
Input
PULL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
<Input: Max. 128 device points (16 input points 8 scanning points = 128 points), output: Max. 16 points>
Operation panel function Operation panels can be used to perform input operations (e.g. touch key operations, numerical inputs, screen switching) by connecting to the external I/O unit. Sound output function The sound output is available by connecting speakers or other devices to the GOT.
Error in Line A
Alarm detected by status observation!

Mitsubishi PLC
Alarm screen
Error in Line A
Q25HCPU
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
PULL
USB
PULL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Backup/restore function The sequence programs, parameters and set values of the connected device can be backed up to the CF card in the GOT. Users can perform batch operation to restore the data to the connected device.
Example of use 1) Example of use 2)
In case of PLC CPU failure, users can quickly replace the faulty device and restore the system by using previously backed up data.
When a problem occurs, or when the PLC CPU program is updated, the sequence program data can be transferred, analyzed, and corrected without requiring an experienced engineer, increasing time and cost efficiency.
Worksite Office
If data is backed up
CF card
Q25HCPU
MODE RUN ERR USER BAT BOOT
Replace CPU
Sequence program, etc.
Restore
Q25HCPU
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
USB
PULL
PULL
USB
PULL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Sequence program, etc.

Q25HCPU
CF card
Data transfer
2) Analysis and correction
1) Backup
QX41 QX41 QJ71BR11
QX10
QJ71BR11
CPU direct connection
PULL
USB
PULL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
CF card
3) Restore After converting files with a data conversion tool, sequence programs stored in a CF card can be edited with GX Developer. Coming soon
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) ASCII input and statistics graphs for GT10 Applications of GT10 are expanded.
A-4
Expanded manufacturers and models of controllers

GT11 (dedicated to bus connection) The bus connection is added. Bus connection in section 4.1.2 Details of bus connection in 4.1.3 GT15/GT11 Matsushita Electric Works: The FP-X model is added. [GT15/GT11] MATSUSHITA programmable controllers in section 4.3.10 Allen Bradley: The ControlLogix, CompactLogix, and FlexLogix series are added. [GT15] The Ethernet connection of the above models is added. [GT15] [Soon to be supported] Allen-Bradley programmable controllers in section 4.3.13 GT10 Connection to the Allen-Bradley programmable controllers is supported. Allen-Bradley programmable controllers in section 4.3.13 Connection to the SIEMENS programmable controllers is supported. SIEMENS programmable controllers in section 4.3.14 Temperature controller Connection to the CHINO controllers. CHINO controllers in section 4.5.4 * For restrictions and precautions on the controllers connected to the GOT, refer to the following manual. GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
A-5
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEWLY ADDED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-6
1 GOT
1.1 Product Lineup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2 Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.3 Part Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1.5 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2 SOFTWARE
21
2.1 Product Lineup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2.2 Specifications (Operating Environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3 FUNCTION
27
3.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.2 Precautions for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.3 Overview of Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4 CONNECTION CONFIGURATION
67
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.1.1 Connection type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.1.2 Bus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 4.1.3 Details of bus connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 4.1.4 Direct CPU connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 4.1.5 Computer link connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 4.1.6 MELSECNET/H connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 4.1.7 MELSECNET/10 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 4.1.8 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 4.1.9 CC-Link connection (via G4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 4.1.10 Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 4.2 Other MITSUBISHI controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.2.1 Inverter connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.2.2 Servo amplifier connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 4.2.3 CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 4.2.4 Multiple-GT11/GT10 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 4.3.1 Connection type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 4.3.2 OMRON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 4.3.3 KEYENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 4.3.4 SHARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 4.3.5 JTEKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
A-6
4.3.6 TOSHIBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.7 HITACHI IES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.8 HITACHI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.9 FUJI FA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.10 MATSUSHITA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.11 YASKAWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.12 YOKOGAWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.13 ALLEN-BRADLEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.14 SIEMENS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Microcomputer connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Temperature Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 OMRON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 SHINKO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 CHINO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.5 FUJI SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.6 YAMATAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.7 YOKOGAWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.8 RKC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Sound output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 External I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Bar code reader connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4 Video/RGB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.5 Printer connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150 151 153 154 155 156 158 160 162 164 166 166 168 169 171 173 175 177 179 180 180 181 182 184 186 187
5 COMPLIANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS 6 EQUIPMENT, SOFTWARE, AND MANUALS 7 GLOSSARY
189 195 203
A-7
MEMO
A-8
1. GOT
This section describes the GOT overview.
1.1 Product Lineup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.3 Part Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1.5 External Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1. GOT
1.1 Product Lineup
Full-spec model GT15
GT15 is designed for the highest performance as a next-generation HMI, and GT15 is at the highest level in GOT1000 series. Wide array of models are available for various control applications.
15
type
TFT
(High intensity and wide angle view)
12.1
type
TFT
12.1
type
TFT
GT1595-XTBA AC type GT1595-XTBD DC type
GT1585V-STBA AC type GT1585V-STBD DC type
GT1585-STBA AC type GT1585-STBD DC type
Resolution: XGA 1024 768 Display color: 65536 colors
Resolution: SVGA 800 600 Display color: 65536 colors Video/RGB compatible
Resolution: SVGA 800 600 Display color: 65536 colors
10.4
type
TFT
GT1575V-STBA AC type GT1575V-STBD DC type
10.4
type
TFT (High intensity and

wide angle view)
GT1575-STBA GT1575-STBD
AC type DC type
10.4
type
TFT
GT1575-VTBA AC type GT1575-VTBD DC type
Resolution: SVGA 800 600 Display color: 65536 colors Video/RGB compatible
Resolution: SVGA 800 600 Display color: 65536 colors
Resolution: VGA 640 480 Display color: 65536 colors
10.4
type
TFT
AC type GT1575-VNBD DC type
GT1575-VNBA
10.4
type
TFT
GT1572-VNBA GT1572-VNBD
AC type DC type
1.1 Product Lineup
8.4
type
TFT
GT1565-VTBA AC type GT1565-VTBD DC type
8.4
type
TFT
GT1562-VNBA AC type GT1562-VNBD DC type
5.7
type
TFT
GT1555-VTBD
DC type
5.7
type
TFT
GT1555-QTBD
DC type
Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: 65536 colors
5.7
type
STN
GT1555-QSBD
DC type
5.7
type
STN
GT1550-QLBD
DC type
Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: Monochrome in 16-level
1.1 Product Lineup
GLOSSARY
EQUIPMENT, SOFTWARE, AND MANUALS
CONFORMANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS
CONNECTION CONFIGURATION
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
Standard model GT11

GT11 is designed for usability and convenience. GT11 gives HMI beginners the high-level functions.
5.7
type
Q bus GT1155-QTBDQ DC type connection*1 A bus *2 GT1155-QTBDA DC type connection
TFT
5.7
type
STN
GT1155-QSBD
DC type
5.7
type
STN
GT1150-QLBD
DC type
Q bus *1 GT1155-QSBDQ DC type connection A bus GT1155-QSBDA DC type connection*2
Q bus GT1150-QLBDQ DC type connection *1 A bus GT1150-QLBDA DC type connection *2
5.7
type
Handy GOT/STN
GT1155HS-QSBD DC type
5.7
type
Handy GOT/STN
GT1150HS-QLBD DC type
*1: For QCPU (Q mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q series) connection *2: For QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) connection
1.1 Product Lineup
1
Basic model GT10
GT10 is a compact HMI, and GT10 satisfies the user needs required for a HMI. The model is a simple GOT but features "usability" unique to GOT1000 series.
GOT
4.5
type
STN
24VDC type RS-422 connection GT1030-LBD2 24VDC type RS-232 connection

GT1030-LBD
4.5
type
STN
GT1030-LBDW 24VDC type RS-422 connection GT1030-LBDW2 24VDC type RS-232 connection
2
SOFTWARE
Resolution: 288 96 Display color: Monochrome (white/black) Backlight: 3-color LED (green/orange/red)
Resolution: 288 96 Display color: Monochrome (white/black) Backlight: 3-color LED (white/pink/red)
3
FUNCTION
3.7
type
STN
GT1020-LBD
24VDC type RS-422 connection
3.7
type
STN
GT1020-LBDW 24VDC type RS-422 connection GT1020-LBDW2 24VDC type RS-232 connection GT1020-LBLW 5VDC type RS-422 connection
GT1020-LBD2 24VDC type RS-232 connection RS-422 GT1020-LBL 5VDC type connection
4
Resolution: 160 64 Display color: Monochrome (white/black) Backlight: 3-color LED (green/orange/red)
Resolution: 160 64 Display color: Monochrome (white/black) Backlight: 3-color LED (white/pink/red)
5
6
7
GLOSSARY
1.1 Product Lineup
Use a personal computer as a GOT
GT SoftGOT1000 Version2
Compatible with GOT1000 series
Screen data created in GT Designer2 Version2 can be used without any modification. GT SoftGOT1000 is HMI software delivering functions of GOT1000 to personal and panel computers.
Remote monitoring via factory LAN

Stay at the office and monitor the production line.
Office Factory Ethernet
Personal computer Personal computer
Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 can be started up on a single personal computer.

Monitoring screen for line 1 Monitoring screen for line 2
Production line
Monitoring screen for line 3 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4
Monitoring screen for line 4
Cost reduction realized by quick troubleshooting!

Monitor the production line from the office and discover a trouble promptly. Take first action quickly.
Compatibility with MELSEC process control

GT SoftGOT1000 has become compatible with the monitor tool of PX Developer, realizing easy setup of process control monitoring system.
Monitor toolbar of PX Developer
GT SoftGOT1000 can be started up and the base screen can be switched by clicking the buttons.
Base screen of GT SoftGOT1000

The desktop can become a graphical monitor screen by the full screen and back screen mode functions.
Face plate of PX Developer

Loop control tags are monitored, operated and adjusted. (Display position can be specified.)
Touch switches and objects of GT SoftGOT1000

Various screens of the PX Developer monitor tool are displayed by clicking the switches or objects. (Display position can be specified.)
Ease of use
Internal device interface function: GOT internal devices can be read and written by user-created applications. A high performance system can be established by using GT Soft GOT1000 with a user-created application.
<Development environment for user application> Microsoft Visual C++ (Version.6.0), Microsoft Visual Basic (Version.6.0)
Starting up other application: Other application can be started up with the touch switches on the monitor screen of GT SoftGOT1000 in the full screen mode. Full screen mode: The title bar and menu bars are hidden to change the screen to the full screen mode.
GT SoftGOT1000 (English version) operating environment

Description Item DOS/V personal computer PC CPU module
Specification
Item
Personal computer
PC/AT compatible machine on which Windows 2000 or Windows XP runs
CONTEC PC CPU Unit (PPC-852-212, PPC-852-217) *6
OS *1 *2
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System (English version) Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System (English version) Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System (English version)
Resolution (in dots) 640 480, 800 600 1024 768, 1280 1024 Display color 65536 colors Memory capacity 57MB
*8 *7 Connection type Bus connection , direct CPU
CPU Required memory

Available space of hard disk *3
Disk drive Display color Display Software
Pentium 300MHz or higher 128MB or more For installation (product only): 250MB or more CD-ROM disk drive 65,536 colors or more
Display that is available for the above OS and has resolution of VGA (640 480 dots or more) For creating/editing project data: GT Designer2*4
connection, computer link connection, MELSECNET connection, Ethernet connection
Hardware *5
GT15-SGTKEY-U (license key for USB port) GT15-SGTKEY-P (license key for parallel port)
For interaction with PX Developer: PX Developer Version1.13P or later GT Designer2 Version2.45X or later GT15-SGTKEY-U (license key for USB port)
Others
Internet Explorer Ver5.0 or later must be installed. Mouse, keyboard, printer, and CD-ROM drive that are available for the above OS.
*1: The administrator authority is required for installing GT SoftGOT1000. The administrator authority is also required when GT SoftGOT100 is used with the following OS. Windows XP Professional Windows XP Home Edition *2: The following functions are not supported. "Compatibility mode" "Fast user switching" "Change your desktop themes (fonts)" "Remote desktop" *3: An extra available space is required for GT Designer2 and PX Developer respectively. For required space for GT Designer2, refer to GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual. For required space to use the monitor tool of PX Developer, refer to PX Developer Version1 Operating Manual (Monitor Tool) A different available space is required when a user-created application are used. *4: Use GT Designer2 that is included in the same GT Works2/GT Designer2 as GT SoftGOT1000. *5: A USB port is required on the personal computer when GT15-SGTKEY-U is used A parallel port (centronics printer interface, printer connecter) is required on the personal computer when GT15-SGTKEY-P is used. Use GT15-SGTKEY-U with the PC CPU module. *6: For CONTEC PC CPU Unit refer to the manual of the PC CPU module to be used. *7: The required equipment differs depending on the connection type. *8: Available only with the PC CPU module.
1.1 Product Lineup
MEMO
1.1 Product Lineup

CONFORMANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS CONNECTION CONFIGURATION FUNCTION SOFTWARE
7
GOT
GLOSSARY
1.2 Specification
GT15
General Specifications
Item
Operating ambient temperature *1
Specifications
Display section
Other than the display section Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient humidity *2 Storage ambient humidity *2
0 to 50 0 to 50 -20 to 60 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing Acceleration Half-amplitude Sweep count Frequency Compliant with Under intermittent 5 to 9Hz 3.5mm 10 times JIS B3502 9.8m/s2 vibration 9 to 150Hz each in and 5 to 9Hz 1.75mm X, Y and IEC61131-2 Under continuous 2 vibration 9 to 150Hz Z directions 4.9m/s Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC61131-2 (147 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y and Z directions) No corrosive gas 2000m or less Inside control panel or less 2 or less Self-cooling
Vibration resistance *3
Shock resistance Operating atmosphere Operating altitude *4 Installation location Overvoltage category *5 Pollution degree *6 Cooling method
Performance Specifications
Specifications Item
GT1595-XTBA GT1595-XTBD
*1: When mounting an extension unit on the MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25 or GT15-J71BR13) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13), set the operating ambient temperature of the general specification to a value 5 lower than the maximum temperature. *2: For the STN LCD type, the wet-bulb temperature is 39 or lower. *3: For the vibration resistance specification when using the MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z or GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z), refer to the manual of a communication unit to be used.(The specification is different from the specification of the GOT main unit.) *4: Do not use and store the GOT under pressure higher than the atomospheric pressureof altitude 0m.Doing so can cause a malfunction. *5: The item indicates the section of thepower supply to which the equipment is assumedto be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category applies to equipments for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V. *6: The item indicates the generation rate of conductive materials in environments that the device is used. In the environment corresponding toPollution level 2, basically only nonconductive pollution occurs, however temporary conductivity may occur due to the occasional condensing.
GT1585V-STBA GT1575V-STBA GT1585V-STBD GT1575V-STBD GT1575-VTBA GT1575-VNBA GT1572-VNBA GT1585-STBA GT1575-STBA GT1575-VTBD GT1575-VNBD GT1572-VNBD GT1585-STBD GT1575-STBD TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view) TFT color liquid crystal display Type Screen size 12.1" 10.4" 15" SVGA (800 600 dots) VGA (640 480 dots) XGA (1024 768 dots) Resolution 246(W) 184.5(H) [mm] 304.1(W) 228.1(H) [mm] 211(W) 158(H) [mm] Display size 16-dot standard font: 64 16-dot standard font: characters 48lines 50 characters 37 lines (2-byte character) 16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (2-byte character) (2-byte character) Display character 12-dot standard font: 85 12-dot standard font: 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (2-byte character) characters 64lines 66 characters 50 lines (2-byte character) (2-byte character) Left/Right: 75 degrees, Top: 50 degrees, Bottom: 60 degrees 65536 colors Left/Right: 60 degrees, Top: 40 degrees, Bottom: 50 degrees 256 colors Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 85 degrees Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 85 degrees 16 colors Left/Right: 45 degrees, Top: 30 degrees, Bottom:20 degrees
Display section Display color

Display angle *6 Contrast adjustment
Intensity of LCD only

Intensity adjustment
450 [cd/m2]
Approx. 52,000 hours (Operating ambient temperature: 25 )
350 [cd/m2]
400 [cd/m2]
380 [cd/m2]
200 [cd/m2] 4-level adjustment Approx. 41,000 hours (Operating ambient temperature: 25 )
Life Backlight Life*1 Type Number of touch keys Key size

Number of points that can be simultaneously pressed
8-level adjustment Approx. 50,000 hours (Operating ambient temperature: 25
Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight shutoff detection function, setting backlight shutoff/screen saving time possible Approx. 40,000 h or longer Approx. 50,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25 ) Matrix resistive film Analog resistive film 1900 objects/screen (38 lines 50 columns) 1,200 objects/screen (30 lines 40 columns) Min. 2 2 dots (per key) Simultaneous presses not allowed. *2 (Only 1 point can be touched.) 1 [m] Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 70 degrees 0 to 4 seconds Built-in flash memory 9Mbytes (for storing project data, the extended function OS and option OS) 100,000 times GT15-BAT lithium battery (Option) Clock data and maintenance time notification data Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25 Min. 16 16 dots (per key) (16 8 for the bottom line) Max. 2 objects
1 million times or more (operating 0.98N max.)
Touch panel
Min. 16
16 dots (per key)
Life Human sensor

Detection length Detection range Detection delay time
None None None Built-in flash memory 5MB (for storing project data, the extended function OS and option OS)
C drive Memory *3 Life (Number of write times) Battery Backup target Life RS-232 Built-in interface USB CF card Option function board Extension unit
RS-232, 1c transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
Buzzer output Protective structure External dimensions (Excluding 397(W) 296(H) 61(D) [mm] USB environmental protection cover) Panel cutting dimension 383.5(W) 282.5(H) [mm] Weight (Installation fittings 4.9[kg] are not included)
Drawing software Compatible software package Simulator function
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data upload/ download, OS installation, FA transparent function) Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I Application: Data transfer, data storage For option function board mounting, 1ch For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch Single tone (tone length adjustable) Outside the enclosure: IP67*4 Inside the enclosure: IP2X 316(W) 242(H) 52(D) [mm] 302(W) 228(H) [mm] 2.8[kg] GT1575V: 2.3 [kg] GT1575: 2.4 [kg] 303(W) 214(H) 49(D) [mm] 200(H) [mm] 2.3[kg]
289(W) 2.4[kg]
GT Designer2 Version 2*5 GT Simulator2 Version 2*5
*1: With the screen saver function or the backlight off function of the GOT, burn-in of the display is prevented and the backlight life is *5:Use the software package with the latest version. increased. For the latest version, access the MELFANSweb website (http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html). *2: The display is an analog resistive touch panel. If two or more points are touched simultaneously on the display section, the switch *6:The liquid crystal display panel has the characteristics called tone reversal.Note that some colors may not be easy to see at that is located around the center of the touched point may operate.Do not touch the display section in two points or more the written display angle or smaller angles. simultaneously. In the liquid crystal display panel, bright dots (always lit) and dark dot (not lit) may occur as a characteristic. *3: The built-in memory is a ROM that new data can be written without deleting the written data. This is due to lots of display elements in the liquid crystal display panel. *4: Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached.(Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when In addition, flickers may occur depending on the display color. a USB cable is connected.)However, not all environments for the user are guaranteed.
Note that the occurrence of bright dots and dark dots is not a product failure but a characteristic.
1.2 Specification
Specifications Item
GT1565-VTBA GT1565-VTBD Type Screen size Resolution Display size Display character Display section Display color Display angle *6
Contrast adjustment
TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view)
GT1562-VNBA GT1562-VNBD
TFT color liquid crystal display
GT1555-VTBD
GT1555-QTBD
GT1555-QSBD
GT1550-QLBD
STN monochrome (white/black) liquid crystal display
TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view) 5.7"
STN color liquid crystal display
8.4" VGA (640 480 dots) 171(W) 128(H) [mm] 16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (2-byte character) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (2-byte character) 65536 colors Left/Right: 65 degrees, Top: 50 degrees, Bottom: 60 degrees 16 colors Left/Right: 45 degrees, Top: 20 degrees, Bottom: 20 degrees 150[cd/m2]
QVGA (320 240 dots) 115(W) 86(H) [mm] 16-dot standard font: 20 characters 15 lines (2-byte character) 12-dot standard font: 26 characters 20 lines (2-byte character) 65536 colors Left/Right: 80 degrees, Top: 80 degrees, Bottom: 70 degrees Left/Right: 70 degrees, Top: 70 degrees, Bottom:50 degrees 4096 colors monochrome (16-level) Left/Right: 55 degrees, Left/Right: 45 degrees, Top: 20 degrees, Top: 65 degrees, Bottom:40 degrees Bottom: 70 degrees 16-level adjustment 380 [cd/m2] 220 [cd/m2]
Intensity of LCD only Intensity adjustment Life
380 [cd/m2]
350 [cd/m2]
400 [cd/m2]
8-level adjustment 4-level adjustment Approx. 41,000 hours (Operating ambient temperature: 25 )
Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight shutoff detection function, setting backlight shutoff/screen saving time possible
8-level adjustment Approx. 50,000 hours (Operating ambient temperature: 25 )
Backlight Life*1 Type Number of touch keys Touch panel

*7
Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight shutoff detection function, setting backlight shutoff/screen saving time possible Approx. 58,000 h or longer Approx. 40,000 h or longer Approx. 75,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25 ) Matrix resistive film 1,200 objects/screen (30 lines 40 columns) 300 objects/screen (15 lines 20 columns) Min. 16 16 dots (per key) Max. 2 objects 1 million times or more (operating 0.98N max.) None None None
Key size
Life Human sensor

Detection length Detection range Detection delay time
Built-in flash memory 9Mbytes Built-in flash memory 5MB (for storing project data, the extended function OS and option OS) (for storing project data, the extended function OS and option OS)
Life (Number of write times)
Memory
*3
C drive
Built-in flash memory 9Mbytes (for storing project data, the extended function OS and option OS) 100,000 times GT15-BAT lithium battery (Option) Clock data and maintenance time notification data Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25 )
Battery
Backup target
Life RS-232 Built-in interface USB
RS-232, 1ch transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data upload/ download, OS installation, FA transparent function) Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I Application: Data transfer, data storage CF card For option function board mounting, 1ch Option function board For communication unit/option unit mounting, 1ch For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch Extension unit Single tone (tone length adjustable) Buzzer output Outside the enclosure: IP67*4 Inside the enclosure: IP2X Protective structure External dimensions (Excluding 241(W) 192(H) 52(D) [mm] 167(W) 135(H) 60(D) [mm] USB environmental protection cover) Panel cutting dimension Weight (Installation fittings are not included) Drawing software Compatible software package Simulator function
*7:
227(W) 176(H) [mm] 1.9[kg] GT Designer2 Version GT Simulator2 Version 2*5 2*5
153(W) 121(H)[mm]
A stylus pen can be used for GT1555-VTBD. A small touch switch can be pressed easily with a stylus pen. The stylus pen to be used must satisfy the following specifications. Material: Polyacetal resin Pen tip radius: 0.8mm or more
1.2 Specification
GLOSSARY
1.1[kg]
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
Power Supply Specifications

Specifications
GT1575V-STBA GT1575-STBA GT1575-VTBA GT1575-VNBA GT1572-VNBA GT1565-VTBA GT1562-VNBA GT1575V-STBD GT1575-STBD GT1575-VTBD GT1575-VNBD GT1572-VNBD GT1565-VTBD GT1562-VNBD
Item
GT1595-XTBA
GT1585V-STBA GT1585-STBA
GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-STBD GT1585-STBD
Input power supply voltage Input frequency Input max. apparent power Power consumption 56W or less At backlight off 30W or less 50A or less (4ms) (maximum load)
100 to 240VAC (+10% -15%) 50/60Hz 5% 110VA (maximum load) 41W or less 28W or less 45A or less (4ms) (maximum load) 20ms or less (100VAC or more) 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 39W or less 28W or less 40A or less (4ms) (maximum load) 57W or less (2,380mA/24VDC) 32W or less (1,330mA/24VDC) 100A or less (4ms) (maximum load)
24VDC (+25%, -20%)
Inrush current
Permissible instantaneous power failure time
43W or less (1,790mA/24VDC) 30W or less (1,250mA/24VDC) 115A or less (1ms) (maximum load) 10ms or less 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1
41W or less (1,710mA/24VDC) 30W or less (1,250mA/24VDC) 115A or less (1ms) (maximum load)
Noise immunity Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)
1500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and ground 500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and ground 10M or more across power terminals and ground by a 500VDC insulation resistance tester 0.75 to 2 [mm2] Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A 0.5 to 0.8 [N m]
10
1.2 Specification

Specifications
1
GT1555-QTBD GT1555-QSBD GT1550-QLBD
Item
GT1555-VTBD
Power consumption
At backlight off
Inrush current
Permissible instantaneous power failure time
19W or less (790mA/24VDC) 14W or less (580mA/24VDC) 67A or less (1ms) (maximum load)
18W or less (750mA/24VDC)
17W or less (710mA/24VDC) 13W or less (540mA/24VDC) 60A or less (1ms) (maximum load)
15W or less (620mA/24VDC)
0.75 to 2 [mm2] Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A 0.5 to 0.8 [N m]
Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block screw)
1.2 Specification
11
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
Noise immunity Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal
10ms or less 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and ground 10M&drohm or more across power terminals and ground by a 500VDC insulation resistance tester
GOT
Input power supply voltage Input frequency Input max. apparent power
24VDC (+25%, -20%)
GT11
General Specifications
Item
Operating ambient Display section Other than the temperature
display section
Specifications
0 to 50 0to 55 Storage ambient temperature -20 to 60 Operating ambient humidity *1 10 to 90 RH, non-condensing *1 Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH, non-condensing Frequency Acceleration Half-amplitude Sweep count 5 to 9Hz 3.5mm 10 times Compliant with Under intermittent Vibration resistance 9 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 each in JIS B3502 and vibration 5 to 9Hz 1.75mm X, Yand Z IEC61131-2 Under continuous vibration 9 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 directions Shock resistance Operating atmosphere Operating altitude *2 Installation location Overvoltage category *3 Pollution degree *4 Cooling method Compliant with JIS B3502 and IEC61131-2 (147 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y and Z directions) No corrosive gas 2000m or less Inside control panel *6 or less 2 or less Self-cooling
*1: The wet-bulb temperature must be 39 or lower. *2: Do not use and store the GOT under pressure higher than the atomospheric pressure of altitude 0m.Doing so can cause a malfunction. *3: The item indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electricalpower distribution network and the machinery within premises.Category applies to equipments for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V. *4: The item indicates the generation rate of conductive materials in environments that the device is used. In the environment corresponding to Pollution level 2, basically only nonconductive pollution occurs, however temporary conductivity may occur due to the occasional condensing. *5: GT115 HS must be 0 to 40 . *6: Except GT115 HS.
Specifications Item
GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-QLBD
STN monochrome(white/ black) liquid crystal display
GT1155HS-QSBD
GT1150HS-QLBD
STN monochrome(white/ black) liquid crystal display
GT1155-QTBDQ GT1155-QTBDA
TFT color liquid crystal display
GT1155-QSBDQ GT1155-QSBDA
GT1150-QLBDQ GT1150-QLBDA
STN monochrome LCD
Type 5.7" Screen size QVGA (320 240 dots) Resolution 115(W) 86(H) [mm] (when displayed in landscape) 115(W) 86(H) [mm] 115(W) 86(H) [mm] (when displayed in landscape) Display size 16-dot standard font: 20 characters 15 lines (2-byte character), 12-dot standard font: 26 characters 20 lines (2-byte character) (when displayed in landscape) Display character Monochrome (white/black) Monochrome (white/black) Monochrome (white/black) Display color 256 colors 256 colors 256 colors in 16-level in 16-level in 16-level Display section Display angle Contrast adjustment Intensity of LCD only Intensity adjustment Life Backlight Life*1 Type Number of touch keys Touch panel Key size
Left/Right: 50 degrees, Top: 50 degrees, Bottom: 60 degrees(when displayed in landscape)
Left/Right: 45 degrees, Left/Right: 50 degrees, Left/Right: 45 degrees, Left/Right: 70 degrees, Left/Right: 55 degrees, Left/Right: 45 degrees, Top: 20 degrees, Top: 50 degrees, Top: 65 degrees, Top: 20 degrees, Top: 20 degrees, Top: 70 degrees, Bottom: 40 degrees (when Bottom: 60 degrees Bottom:40 degrees Bottom: 70 degrees Bottom:40 degrees Bottom:50 degrees displayed in landscape)
16-level adjustment
16-level adjustment
220 [cd/m2] 400 [cd/m2] 380 [cd/m2] 220 [cd/m2] 8-level adjustment Approx. 50,000 hours (operating ambient temperature of 25 ) Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight shutoff detection function, setting backlight shutoff/screen saving time possible
Approx. 75,000 h or longer Approx. 54,000 h or longer Approx. 75,000 h or longer Approx. 54,000 h or longer
350 [cd/m2]
220 [cd/m2]
350 [cd/m2]
Approx. 75,000 h or longer )
Approx. 54,000 h or longer
Life C drive *2
Memory
(Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25 Matrix resistive film 300 objects/screen (matrix structure of 15 lines 20 columns) Min. 16 16 dots (per key) Max. 2 objects 1 million times or more (operating 0.98N max.) Flash memory 3MB (for storing project data and OS) 100,000 times Built-in SRAM 512KB (for battery backup) GT11-50BAT lithium battery
Life (Number of write times)
D drive Battery
Backup target
Life
Bus RS-422, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female) Application: Controller communication
Clock data, alarm history, recipe data Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25 ) QCPU (Q mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q series), 1ch or QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series), 1ch Application: programmable controller bus connection
RS-422
RS-422/232 Built-in interface
1ch for each of RS-422 and 232 (select one of RS-422 and 232 for use) Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400 /19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: Round shape 32-pin (male) Application: Controller communication
RS-232, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600 RS-232, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600 /38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male) /38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male) Application: Personal computer connection (Project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-232, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600 /38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male) Application: Barcode reader connection, Personal computer connection (Project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-232
Application: Personal computer connection (Project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
USB CF card
Option function board
Buzzer output Outside the enclosure: IP67*3 Inside the enclosure: IP2X Protective structure External dimensions (Excluding 164(W) 135(H) 56(D)[mm] USB environmental protection cover) Panel cutting dimension 153(W) 121(H)[mm] Weight 0.7kg (Installation fittings are not included.)
Compatible
Drawing software
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device 1ch Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data upload/ download, OS installation, FA transparent function) Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I Application: Data transfer, data storage (Built-in option function board) For option function board mounting, 1ch Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Outside the enclosure: IP65*4 Outside the enclosure: IP67*3 Inside the enclosure: IP2X
176(W)
220(H)
93(D)[mm]
167(W) 135(H)
65(D)[mm]
153(W) 121(H)[mm] 1.0kg (Only the main unit) GT Designer2 Version 2*5 GT Simulator2 Version 2*5
0.9kg (Installation fittings are not included.)
software package Simulator function
*1: With the screen saver function or the backlight off function of the GOT, burn-in of the display is prevented and the backlight life is increased. *2: The built-in memory is a ROM that new data can be written without deleting the written data. *3: Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached.(Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected.) However, not all environments for the user are guaranteed. *4: Not all environments for the user are not guaranteed.The protective degree is not available when the interface environmental protection cover or the back face environmental protection cover is removed. *5: Use the software package with the latest version. For the latest version, access the MELFANSweb website (http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html).
In the liquid crystal display panel, bright dots (always lit) and dark dot (not lit) may occur as a characteristic. This is due to lots of display elements in the liquid crystal display panel. In addition, flickers may occur depending on the display color. Note that the occurrence of bright dots and dark dots is not a product failure but a characteristic.
12
1.2 Specification
Specifications Item
GT1030-LBD
GT1030-LBDW
GT1030-LBD2
GT1030-LBDW2
GT1020-LBD GT1020-LBL
GT1020-LBDW GT1020-LBLW
GT1020-LBD2
GT1020-LBDW2
Type Screen size Resolution Display size Display character Display section
Display color Display angle Contrast adjustment
STN monochrome (white/black) liquid crystal display 4.5" (288 96 dots) 109.42(W) 35.98(H) [mm]
16-dot standard font: 36 characters 12-dot standard font: 48 characters 6 lines (1-byte character), 18 characters 8 lines (1-byte character), 24 characters 6 lines (2-byte character) 8 lines (2-byte character)
3.7" (160 64 dots) 86.4(W) 34.5(H) [mm] 16-dot standard font: 20 characters 4 lines (1-byte character), 10 characters 4 lines (2-byte character) (when displayed in landscape)
Monochrome (white/black) Left/Right: 30 degrees, Top: 20 degrees, Bottom: 30 degrees (when displayed in landscape) 16-level adjustment
200 [cd/m2] (in green) 300 [cd/m2] (in white) 200 [cd/m2] (in green) 300 [cd/m2] (in white) 200 [cd/m2] (in green) 300 [cd/m2] (in white) 200 [cd/m2] (in green) 300 [cd/m2] (in white)
Intensity of LCD only Intensity adjustment Life*1 Backlight Color
8-level adjustment Approx. 50,000 hours (Time when display luminance reaches 20% at the operating ambient temperature of 25 )
3-color LED (green, orange, red) 3-color LED (white, pink, red) (Replacement not required) (Replacement not required) 3-color LED (green, orange, red) (Replacement not required) 3-color LED (white, pink, red) 3-color LED (green, orange, red) (Replacement not required) (Replacement not required) 3-color LED (white, pink, red) (Replacement not required) 3-color LED (green, orange, red) (Replacement not required) 3-color LED (white, pink, red) (Replacement not required)
Function Type Number of touch keys Touch panel Key size

Number of points that can multaneously pressed
Matrix resistive film Min. 16
Status (Lit/Blink/Not lit) can be controlled. Screen saving time can be set. Analog resistive film Max. 50 objects/screen Min. 2 2 dots (per key)
Not available (When two or more switches are pressed simultaneously, the switch at the middle point between the pressed switches may operate.)
16 dots (per key)
Max. 2 objects
Life Backup target Life User memory *2 Life (Number of write times)
RS-422, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600
1 million times or more (operating 0.98N max.)

GT11-50 BAT lithium battery Clock data, alarm history, recipe data Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25 ) Built-in flash ROM For storing project data (1.5MB or less) and OS
RS-232, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600/ 38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: Connector terminal block with 9 pins Application: Programmable controller communication
Battery
Memory
Built-in flash ROM For storing project data (512MB or less), OS, alarm history, recipe data
RS-422, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600 /38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: Connector terminal block with 9 pins Application: Programmable controller communication
RS-232, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600 /38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: Connector terminal block with 9 pins Application: Programmable controller communication
Built-in interface
Programmable controller communication
/38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: Connector terminal block with 9 pins Application: Programmable controller communication
Personal computer communication
RS-232, 1ch transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps Connector shape: Mini DIN of 6 pins (female) Application: Personal computer communication (Project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
Buzzer output Protective structure *3 External dimensions Panel cutting dimension Weight Compatible software package
Single tone (adjustable between long, short and OFF) Outside the enclosure: IP67 113(W) 74(H) 27(D) [mm] 137(W) 66(H) [mm] 105(W) 66(H) [mm] 0.3kg (Installation fittings are not included.) 0.2kg (Installation fittings are not included.)
145(W) 76(H) 29.5(D) [mm]
*1: With the screen saver function or the backlight off function of the GOT, burn-in of the display is prevented and the backlight life is increased. *2: The built-in memory is a ROM that new data can be written without deleting the written data. *3: All environments for the user are not guaranteed. *4: Use the software package with the latest version. For the latest version, access the MELFANSweb website (http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/melfansweb). In the liquid crystal display panel, bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (not lit) may occur as a characteristic. This is due to lots of display elements in the liquid crystal display panel. In addition, flickers may occur depending on the display color. Note that the occurrence of bright dots and dark dots is not a product failure but a characteristic.
1.2 Specification
13
GLOSSARY
GT Designer2 Version 2*4
100,000 times
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT

Specifications Item
GT1155-QSBD GT1155HS-QSBD GT1150-QLBD GT1150HS-QLBD GT1155-QTBDQ GT1155-QTBDA GT1155-QSBDQ GT1155-QSBDA GT1150-QSBDQ GT1150-QSBDA
Input power supply voltage Input frequency Input max. apparent power Power consumption At backlight off Inrush current Permissible instantaneous power failure time Noise immunity Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw) Grounding
24VDC (+10%, -15%) Ripple voltage 200mV or less
9.84W or less (410mA/24VDC) 9.36W or less (390mA/24VDC) 11.16W or less (465mA/24VDC) 9.72W or less (405mA/24VDC) 7.92W or less (330mA/24VDC)
4.32W or less (180mA/24VDC) 15A or less (2ms, maximum load) 5ms or less 1000Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width (when measuring with a noise simulator under 30 to 100Hz noise frequency)
5.04W or less (210mA/24VDC) 26A or less (4ms, maximum load) 10ms or less 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width (when measuring with a noise simulator under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency)
500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth 10M or more across power terminals and ground by a 500VDC insulation resistance tester 0.75 to 2 [mm2] *1 Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A *1 0.5 to 0.8 [N m] *1
*1: Except GT115
HS.
Specifications Item
GT1030-LBD GT1020-LBD GT1030-LBD2 GT1020-LBD2 GT1030-LBDW GT1020-LBDW GT1030-LBDW2 GT1020-LBDW2 24VDC (+10%, -15%) Ripple voltage 200mV or less GT1020-LBL GT1020-LBLW 5VDC ( 5%)
Input power supply voltage Input frequency Input max. apparent power Power consumption At backlight off Inrush current Permissible instantaneous power failure time Noise immunity Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance
2.2W or less (90mA/24VDC) 1.7W or less (70mA/24VDC) 18A or less (26.4VDC) for 1ms
1.7W or less (80mA/24VDC) 1.2W or less (50mA/24VDC) 13A or less (26.4VDC) for 1ms
1.1W or less (220mA/5VDC) 0.6W or less (120mA/5VDC)
5ms or less 1000Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width (when measuring with a noise simulator under 30 to 100Hz noise frequency) 500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth 10M or more across power terminals and earth by a 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Applicable wire size 0.14 to 1.0mm2 (twisted wire), 0.14 to 1.5mm2 (single wire) Applicable solderless terminal AI2.5-6BU, AI0.34-6TQ, AI0.5-6WH (manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.) Applicable tightening torque 0.22 to 0.25 [N m] (Terminal block terminal screw) Grounding (100 or less) Connect to the control Grounding panel if grounding is not possible
14
1.2 Specification
1.3 Part Name

GT1595/GT1585/GT157
Reset switch Extension interface Option function board interface Power terminal Human sensor
Available only for GT159 and GT1585(V)
1
/GT156
S.MODE (OS installation switch) (Available onyl for GT1595) CF card interface Battery holder CF card access LED CF card access switch Video/RGB interface
Only avaivlable for GT1585V and GT1575V
GT155
Extension interface Option function board interface CF card access LED CF card access switch Reset switch CF card interface
POWER LED USB interface
POWER LED USB interface RS-232 interface
RS-232 interface * The illustration is GT1585V-STBA.
Power terminal Battery holder
GT11
CF card access LED Battery Power terminal
CF card access switch CF card cover Option function board interface *

(A dummy cover is placed at factory default)
Handy GOT
Interface environmental protection cover
CF card interface RS-232 interface Emergency stop switch Hook for wall Hook for neck strap Back face environmen protection cover Option function board interface Battery Hand strap
USB interface Selector switch with key Display section Touch panel POWER LED
Reset switch * CF card interface A B
Six operation switches POWER LED USB interface Display section Touch panel GT115 A B -Q BD GT115 GT115 -Q -Q BDQ BDA RS-422/232 interface Grip switch
RS-232 interface RS-422 interface

-Q
Bus interface RS-232 interface

BDQ and GT115 -Q BDA.
*: The option function board interface and reset switch are

not available for GT115
GT10
C
+ INPUT - 24VDC (FG) RS-422 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB
Personal computer interface (RS-232)
RS-232
GT1030-LBD GT1020-LBD GT1030-LBDW GT1020-LBDW C D Power terminal RS-422 interface
GT1020-LBL GT1020-LBLW
GT1030-LBD2 GT1020-LBD2 GT1030-LBDW2 GT1020-LBDW2 Power terminal
Display section Touch panel
RS-422 interface Power terminal
RS-232 interface
1.3 Part Name
15
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
1.4 Installation
Panel cutting dimension
When mounting GOT Screen size
15" 12.1" 10.4" 8.4" 5.7" 5.7" 4.5" 3.7"
(Unit: mm)
+2 *4 0
GOT main unit type

GT1595 GT1585 *1 GT157 *2 GT156 GT155 *3 GT115 *3 GT1030 GT1020
A
383.5 302 289 227 153 137 105
B
282.5 228 200 176 121 66 66
+2 *4
*1: Same dimensions as A985GOT(-V) *2: Same dimensions as A975/970GOT(-B) *3: Same dimensions as F940GOT *4: 0 to 1mm for GT10 For compatibility with GOT-900 series, refer to "Precautions for Use" in section 3.2.
Panel opening
B0
When mounting CF card extension unit (control panel side installation unit)
Type GT15-CFEX-C08SET
A
94.0
B
33.0
Precautions on mounting and removal Install the CF card extension unit on the control panel out of the way for the equipment inside the control panel, including the cables of extension units and the CF card interface of the GOT. Keep the distance of 25mm between the CF card extension unit and the GOT. For the installation location, refer to GT15 User's Manual.
Product installation interval

Keep the following distance between a GOT and other devices.
GT15 Item
Only GOT
Bus connection unit is mounted Serial communication unit is connected RS-422 conversion unit is mounted Ethernet communication unit is mounted (Unit: mm)
GT1595
GT1585
GT157
50 or more (31 or more)
GT156
GT155
B
65 or more
50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more
E
C
Other device and control panel
51 or more 68 or more 73 or more 50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (20 or more)
CC-Link communication unit is mounted(GT15-J61BT13) MELSECNET/H communication unit (coaxial) is mounted MELSECNET/H communication unit (optical) is mounted Printer unit is mounted Video input unit is mounted RGB input unit is mounted Video/RGB input unit is mounted RGB output unit is mounted CF card unit is mounted CF card extension unit is mounted Sound output unit is mounted External I/O unit is mounted CF card is not used CF card is used 50 or more (20 or more)
50 or more
72 or more
50 or more (20 or more) *1 50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (31 or more) 50 or more (36 or more) 50 or more 50 or more (20 or more) *2 50 or more (20 or more) *3
Panel thickness 2 to 4mm
65 or more
B C D E
80 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (20 or more) 50 or more (20 or more) 100 or more (20 or more)
100 or more
*1: The distance differs depending on the cable to be used. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.The value indicated in the table is a reference value. *2: The value with the coaxial cable 3C-2V (JIS C 3501) *3: The distance differs depending on the cable to be used. If the bending radius of the cable used is greater than the value specified above, apply the value of the cable used.
GT11 C
GOT main unit
GT1155 GT1150
(Unit: mm)
GT10
GOT main unit
(Unit: mm)
A, D
CF card is CF card not used is used
50 or more 80 or more*1 50 or more*2 100 or more 100 or more (20 or more) (20 or more) (20 or more) (20 or more)
GT1030 GT1020
50 or more 50 or more (20 or more *1) (20 or more)
80 or more 50 or more 50 or more (20 or more *2) (20 or more)
*1: 50 or more (20 or more) when placed in a vertical way *2: 80 or more (20 or more) when placed in a vertical way
*1: 50 or more when the RS-232/USB conversion adapter is used. *2: 80 or mroe when a personal computer connection cable is used, or when the RS-232 interface for a personal computer is used in the system where multiple GOTs are connected 50 or more when the RS-232 interface is used with the RS-232/USB
The values enclosed in parenthesis apply to the case where no other equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed. However, keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 or lower even in such a case. The required lead-in allowance for cables may be larger than the size of A (D for GT10) above depending on the unit or cable used.
16
1.4 Installation
1.5 External Dimensions

GOT main unit
GT1595
10 397 320
1
(Unit: mm)
GT1585
10
281
296
227
242
10
199
214
10
56 6
320
250 56 52 6
382
301
288
GT156
10
241 175.5
GT155
10 167 110
GT115
-Q
BD
164 120
10
10
175.5 5
10
10
110 5
120
60 6
53 6
56
52
47 56
226
152
152
10
167 110
62
GT115 -Q GT115 -Q
BDQ BDA
Handy GOT
GT1030
16
176 50
18
75 72 62
10
145 84
10
4.5 80 or more
135
120
204
209
76
65 84
10 29.5 25
84
10 21
48 65
62
10
110
Panel thickness is 1 to 4mm.
3.5 168 74
152
GT1020
10 27 23
76
10 9.5
Panel thickness is 1 to 4mm.
17
GLOSSARY
10
113 76
10
5 7.5
80 or more
74
65 84
13
FUNCTION
120
175
190
135
135
120
SOFTWARE
10
222 49
61
GOT
316 263
GT157
10 303 252
Bus connection cable

Cable model Cable length (L)
External dimensions
Fig. A
Programmable controller side GOT side
GT15-QC B 0.6, 1.2, 3, 5, 10m Fig. 1 GT15-QC BS 15, 20, 25, 30, 35m Fig. 1 GT15-C NB 1.2, 3, 5m Fig. 2 GT15-AC B 0.6, 1.2, 3, 5m Fig. 3 Fig. 4 GT15-A370C B-S1 1.2, 2.5m GT15-A370C B 1.2, 2.5m Fig. 5 GT15-A1SC B 0.7, 1.2, 3, 5m Fig. 6 GT15-A1SC NB 0.45, 0.7, 3, 5m Fig. 7 GT15-C EXSS-1 *1 10.6, 20.6, 30.6m GT15-EXCNB 0.5m Fig. 8 GT15-C BS 0.7, 1.2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30m Fig. 9 GT15-J2C10B 1m Fig. 10 *1: GT15-C EXSS-1 is a set product of GT15-EXCNB and GT15-C BS.(Refer to Fig. A.) (Unit: mm)
Fig. 1
+
GT15-C BS (Fig. 9)
60 50 58 35 40 A7GT-CNB side 110 20
GOT side
CON1
GT15-EXCNB (Fig. 8)
CON2
Fig. 5
12.4 33 110 49.9
L Cable approx. 8.0
Motion controller Ferrite core approx. pp CPU side Green holder tube
Fig. 6
12.4 49.9
33 160
L Cable approx. p 8.0
10
34.2 145
L Cable approx. 10 95
Fig. 7
Ferrite core approx. pp Green holder tube 12.4 49.9 33 110 L 0 Cable approx. 8.0 50
35 40 60 20
42
Ferrite core approx. 35 40 Red holder tube

Fig. 2
20 58
60
L
70 Cable ap approx. 8.0 50
33
12.4 49.9
Programmable g pp 35 40 A7GT-CNB side controller side Ferrite core approx. Green holder tube 12.4
Fig. 8
33
C CON1
1000
FG cable
75
GOT side G CON2
20.5
Fig. 3
GOT side Programmable g Ferrite core approx. pp 35 40 0 controller side Green holder tube L 20 60 50 70 Cable approx. 17.0
Fig. 9
49.9
Programmable controller side
500 Cable approx. pp 9.0 0 L FG cable 160
GOT side
12.4 49.9
33
58
Fig. 4
12.4 49.9
33
110
Ferrite core approx. pp 32 16 Green holder tube L Cable approx. 8.0 50

Fig. 10
110
pp Cable approx. Ferrite core approx. 9.0 35 40 Blue holder tube 1000 33 12.4 100 Cable approx. 8.0 70 49.9 Ferrite core approx. pp 35 40 Green holder tube A0J2-PW side GOT side
Ferrite core approx. pp Green holder tube
35 40
RS-422 cable
Cable model
GT01-C30R4-25P GT01-C R4-25P GT01-C R4-8P GT10-C R4-8P GT10-C R4-25P
RS-232 cable
External dimensions
Cable length (L)

3m 10, 20, 30m 1, 3, 10, 20, 30m 1, 3, 10, 20, 30m 3, 10, 20, 30m
Cable model
GT01-C30R2-6P GT01-C30R2-9S GT01-C30R2-25P GT10-C30R2-6P 3m 3m 3m 3m
Cable length
External dimensions
Fig. 11 Fig. 12 Fig. 13 Fig. 14 Fig. 15
Fig. 16 Fig. 17 Fig. 18 Fig. 19
(Unit: mm)
Fig. 16
Fig. 11
16
50
3000 7
53
16
16
50 7
3000 20 28
40
13
35
35
55
35
7 35 55
35
6 35
13
Fig. 14
30
L 250
40
Fig. 19
30
3000 200
Approx. 30
40
13
7 25 33
Approx. 48
Fig. 15
30
53 16
55
7 25 33
18
55 13
Fig. 13
16
50
L 25 33
40
13
Fig. 18
16
50
3000 6
53
16
35
Fig. 12
16
50
53
16
Fig. 17
16
50
3000 6
50
16
13
60
58
(Unit: mm)
7
Communication unit and option unit

Communication unit and bus extension connector box
Product name Model
External dimensions
Fig. 20
63
3 GOT main unit
Fig. 21
107 98
133
GOT main unit B 3
Fig. 22
136.8
GOT main unit
98 107
Standard model bus connection unit for 1ch GT15-QBUS QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) 2ch GT15-QBUS2 Standard model bus connection unit for 1ch GT15-ABUS Bus QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) 2ch GT15-ABUS2 connection Thinned model bus connection unit for 1ch GT15-75QBUSL QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) 2ch GT15-75QBUS2L unit Thinned model bus connection unit for 1ch GT15-75ABUSL QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) 2ch GT15-75ABUS2L RS-232 serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P (D-sub 9-pin (male)) Serial RS-422/485 serial communication unit communication GT15-RS4-9S (D-sub 9-pin ( p ( (female)) )) unit RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block) GT15-RS4-TE RS-422 RS-232 to RS-422 conversion unit (9-pin) conversion unit RS-232 to RS-422 conversion unit (25-pin) Bus extension connector box Bus connector conversion box MELSECNET/H Optical loop unit communication unit Coaxial bus unit CC-Link communication unit Intelligent device station Ethernet communication unit GT15-RS2T4-9P GT15-RS2T4-25P A9GT-QCNB A7GT-CNB GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13 GT15-J61BT13 GT15-J71E71-100
98 117
98 112
Fig. 20 Fig. 21 Fig. 20 Fig. 21 Fig. 22 Fig. 22 Fig. 22 Fig. 22 Fig. 23 Fig. 23
2.5 30.5 21.5 C
*1 *2 *3
21.5
D 63 3 GOT main unit
*1 *2 *3
17.6 A
X 30.5
2.5 C
101.8
*1 *4 *5
Fig. 23
63
GOT main unit 3
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
RS-232
48 38
RS-422
21.5
Fig. 24 Fig. 25 Fig. 25 Fig. 26 Fig. 27 Fig. 28 Fig. 29 Fig. 30 Fig. 31

External dimensions
30.5 21.5
30.5
20.5
11.5
X 9 31.5
12
2.5
2.5
*1 *3
89.7
29.5
57
*3
*1
46.7
64.2
71.5
From base unit 4.25
80
108 98
155 20 To bus connection unit
2.5
When connector When used connector used
30.5 21.5
Option unit
Product name
Printer unit Video input unit RGB input unit Video/RGB input unit RGB output unit CF card unit CF card extension unit Sound output unit External I/O unit Connector conversion box for Handy GOT
39.5 4.25
9.5
49.5
40.3
Model
GT15-PRN GT15V-75V4 GT15V-75R1 GT15V-75V4R1 GT15V-75ROUT GT15-CFCD GT15-CFEX-C08SET GT15-SOUT GT15-DIO GT11H-CNB-37S
*3
Fig. 32 Fig. 33 Fig. 33 Fig. 33 Fig. 33 Fig. 34 Fig. 35 Fig. 36 Fig. 37 Fig. 38 (Unit: mm)
Fig. 29
117 98
108 98
133
GOT main unit 3 3
Fig. 30
133
GOT main unit 3 3
Fig. 31
63
GOT main unit 3
98 112
12
When F-type connector used
2.5
2.5
2.5 30.5 21.5 X 8
29
101.3
31.3
*3
*3
3
21
*3
Fig. 32
63
3 GOT main unit 0.5
Fig. 33
105 98
133
GOT main unit 3
Fig. 34
105
GOT main unit 30 1.3
*1: Connector shape depends on the model. *4: The following is the dimension of *2: The following is the dimensions of A to E for each A for each communication unit. communication unit.
101 136
8.1 19.7
63
2.4 28.5
2.5
GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2
2.3 2.5 4.5 4.5
0.5 3.0 0.8 3.0
12 11 15 11
31.5 29 29.5 31
33.5 31
GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L
30.5 21.5
2.3 3.9 3.9
18 18
34 26.1
13.5
*3
The illustration is GT15V-75V4R1.
*1 *3
*3
3
GOT main unit
Fig. 35
GOT side 93
Control panel side
Fig. 36
63
One stage Two stage Three stage

15", 10.4" 12.1" 8.4", 5.7" *3 Dimensions of X
Fig. 38
18 25 428
2.5
105
30.5 21.5
21 18 23
42.5 39.5 44.5
64.5 61.5 66.5
63
1.3
0.5
18 5
X
98 110
*3: Dimension X when GOT installed
*5: Dimensions of X with GOT mounted 8 15", 10.4" 12.1" 5 8.4", 5.7" 10
114.5 98
14 32
58
22
13
*3
3.5 drill hole
9 X
62.5
Fig. 37
29.5
18
82
37.5
2.5
*3
29
10.5
GOT main unit
Panel cutting Unit: mm
18 19.5
30.5 21.5
60
*3
19
GLOSSARY
1.8
63
Three stage Two stage One stage
113
60
91
52
98 112
Model
Model
3.5
1.8
63
43
30.6 21.6
13
8.5
FUNCTION
30.5 21.5
30.5 21.5
8.5
20
10.8
SOFTWARE
Fig. 26
20
Fig. 27
Mounting hole 48
Fig. 28
133
GOT main unit 3 3
GOT
MEMO
20
2. SOFTWARE
This chapter describes software required for using the GOT.
2.1 Product Lineup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2.2 Specifications (Operating Environment). . . . . . . . . . . 25
21
2. SOFTWARE
2.1 Product Lineup
Version2
Work more efficiently with icon displayed
Reduction in screen drawing time by half *1
Toolbar
Data compatibility with GT Designer
There are various toolbars including [Figure], [Object], [View], and [My Favorites]. The types and operations for an object and a figure can be easily recognized. The feature increases the work efficiency. It is useful to save frequently used objects and figures in [My Favorites].
Reduction in screen drawing time by half
Windows standard operability and menu configuration
Intuitive tree display, with easy copying, deletion and parts registration
Workspace
Project workspace
The settings in a project, such as created screens and the common setting, are displayed in a tree view. It's easy to see the screen configuration of the entire project so the screen to be edited can be selected right away.
Category workspace
The settings in a project are classified into categories and displayed in a tree view. The device, color, and figure of parts can be batch-changed in category units, even when located on multiple screens.
*:"Category" refers to objects or figures that have been grouped according to purpose.
Library workspace
The registered objects or figures are displayed in a tree view. Frequently used parts can be registered in [My Favorites], permitting quick access to an object or figure.
List display of object and figure setting content
Property sheet
A setting content list can be displayed for the selected object and figure. The properties of objects and figures can be changed without opening the object setting screen. Multiple same-type objects and figures can be selected, and the properties, such as color and character size, can be batch-changed.
Create a screen more smoothly
Temporary area
Save objects to the temporary area for smooth screen creation and layout change.
Object and figure setting screen Dedicated screen for editing parts
Dialog box Library editor

A setting content screen is displayed by double-clicking the object or figure. Figure changes are immediately reflected on the screen. The function allows the user to work while checking the onscreen results, thereby simplifying the process and reducing setting errors.
*:The function is also available at the "Property sheet".
A parts editing screen is displayed by double-clicking the registered parts at the library workspace. Editing of registered parts is quick and easy.
*1: Compared to Mitsubishi Electric's GT Designer.
22
2.1 Product Lineup
Batch-change of object and figure
Batch-change
Useful for changing objects and figures in multiple screens.
Different types of objects (touch switch and numerical display) and figures (circle and rectangle) can also be batch-changed.
Image display of registered parts
Library image list

Registered parts are displayed according to the color, and the library for use can be found easily and quickly.
Designing can be made easier by placing parts in the image list onto the designing screen.
Easy selection of overlapped figures
Data view
An object or figure in the list can be double-clicked for editing.
2.1 Product Lineup
23
GLOSSARY
All the objects and figures on the screen are displayed in a list.
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
The color of devices, objects and figures can be batch-changed. The shape of lamps and touch switches can also be batch-changed.
GOT
Version2
GT Simulator2 is the great debugging software that allows designers to test motion pictures of a GOT on the personal computer screen.
Debugging is possible from a single personal computer.

Preceding debugging is especially useful for tight sch The user only need a single personal computer for intuitive debugging. The motion images can be tested according to the sequence program virtually executed by GT Simulator in one personal computer. A GT Simulator2 screen debugging function allows screen editing in GT Designer2 with the results immediately verifiable in GT Simulator2 thereby greatly reducing debugging man-hours. A touch switch can be clicked with the mouse to monitor devices or check stored data such as system alarms, script error information and alarm history.
GT Simulator2 Version2 (GT Works2 Version2)
Install
GX Developer
GX Simulator
Load program
Drawing software Virtual GOT Virtual programmable controller
Sequence program Load drawing data
RUN
Programming software
Communication/monitoring
Click with mouse
Screen image at personal computer
Debugging is possible by connection with a programmable controller, without actual GOTs

Debugging can be performed using a direct CPU connection between a personal computer (GT Simulator2) and a programmable controller, without actual GOTs. Connection is possible to MITSUBISHI and OMRON programmable controllers.
Connectable programmable controllers MITSUBISHI programmable controller (Q/QnA/A/FX series) MITSUBISHI CNC (MELDAS C6/C64) connection OMRON programmable controller Connection between programmable controller and personal computer Direct CPU connection RS-232/RS-422 Direct CPU connection RS-232 RS-232 connection GT Simulator 2 RS-232/RS-422 connection
MITSUBISHI programmable controller
OMRON programmable controller
Powerful support of customer specifications, Compatibility checks and document creation

While observing the operation image, the customer's screen specifications can be arranged without actual units. Display screen snapshots can be printed or saved as BMP/JPEG files that are extremely useful when creating specifications and operation manuals.
24
2.1 Product Lineup
2.2 Specifications (Operating Environment)

GT Designer2 (English version) operating environment
Item
Personal computer PC/AT compatible machine on which Windows runs Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System (English version) OS Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System (English version) Microsoft WindowsNT Workstation 4.0 Operating System (English version) *2 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System (English version) *2 CPU Required memory of hard disk Disk drive Display color Display *3 Others Pentium 200MHz or higher 64MB or more 100MB or more High Color (16 bits) or more Resolution 800 600 dot or more Internet Explorer Ver5.0 or later must be installed. Mouse, keyboard, printer, and CD-ROM drive that are available for the above OS. Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System (English version)*1*2 Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System (English version)*1*2 Pentium 300MHz or higher128MB or more
1
Description
Available space For installation 500MB or more
For execution
*1: "Compatibility mode", "fast user switching", "change your desktop themes (fonts)", and "remote desktop" are not supported. *2: Administrator authority is required for installing GT Designer2 with Windows NT Workstation4.0, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional, or Windows XP Home Edition.Also, administrator authority is required when GT Designer2 is used with Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition. *3: When the MES interface function is used, the display resolution of 1024 768 dots or more is required.
GT Simulator2 (English version) operating environment

Item
Personal computer
PC/AT compatible machine on which Windows runs Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System (English version) Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System (English version) *3*4 Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System (English version) *3*4 Pentium II 300MHz or higher 128MB or more Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System (English version) Microsoft WindowsNT Workstation 4.0 Operating System (English version) *2 *3 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System (English version) *3 Pentium 200MHz or higher 64MB or more 250MB or more (For product and manual: 400MB or more) 200MB or more CD-ROM disk drive GT15 Simulator: 65536 colors GT11 Simulator: 256 colors Resolution 800 600 dot or more (For using the full screen mode function: Resolution 1024 768 dot or more)
For creating/editing project data
Description
OS
CPU Required memory

Available space of hard disk*1 For installation (product only) For execution
Disk drive Display color Display
GT Designer2 *5 GX Simulator of the version shown below is required according to a CPU to be simulated. *6
Programmable controller CPU to be simulated Software version Version5 "A" Edition or later Version5 "E" Edition or later Version6.00A or later Version6.10L or later Version6.20W or later Version7.08J or later *4: The following functions are not supported. "Compatibility mode" "Fast user switching" "Change your desktop themes (fonts)" "Remote desktop" *5: Use GT Designer2 that is included in the same GT Works as GT Simulator2. *6: Use GT Simulator2, GX Developer, and GX Simulator that support the same language.
Software
For using GX simulator
QCPU (A mode), ACPU, motion controller CPU (A series) QCPU (Q mode) (except Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU), QnACPU, FXCPU Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU FX3UC series, FX3U series
*1: An extra available space is required for GT Designer2, GX Developer, and GX Simulator respectively. *2: Use WindowsNT Workstation4.0 with Service Pack3 or later installed. *3: Administrator authority is required for installing GT Simulator2 with the following OS. WindowsNT Workstation4.0 Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows XP Home Edition Also, administrator authority is required when GT Simulator2 is used with the following OS. Windows XP Professional Windows XP Home Edition
25
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
CD-ROM disk drive
GOT
MEMO
26
3. FUNCTION
This chapter describes available functions for the GOT.
3.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.2 Precautions for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.3 Overview of Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
27
3. FUNCTION
3.1 Functions
Functions for each model
: Available : Partially available : Not available
Extended function/ Option OS installation
Other devices
Category
Page
Model GT GT10 SoftGOT 1000

*13
Function *1
GT15
GT11
*2
Hardware specification Clock function Printer Video input RGB input/RGB output Backlight shutoff detection function FA transparent function Multi-channel function Gateway function MES interface function Base screen Superimpose window display Overlap window display Dialog window display BMP display Figure drawing JPEG display DXF data IGES display
Standard font (Japanese, Japanese (supporting Europe), Simplified Chinese, Simplified (Standard) Chinese (supporting Europe)) Required
*2
*3 (Battery)
Video/ RGB unit
P.38 P.57, 58 P.38 P.39

*6 *4 *4
Required Printer unit Required Required
Function of GOT main unit
P.40 P.41 P.42
*11
Max. 4ch
Required Required (CF card) Required Required (CF card)
P.43
*12
Standard font (Option) HQ font
Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese
Required Required Required Required Required Required
P.44
TrueType font Windows font Stroke standard font (Extended) Stroke font (Option) Object superimposition (layers) Screen switching Station No. switching Screen design Language switching function Password System information Communication settings Startup logo Comment registration Parts registration Data operation function Offset function Security Security level authentication
Required Required Required Required
P.45
P.46
P.47
P.48
function Operator authentication Lamp display Touch switch Numerical display/input Data list display ASCII display/input Clock display Comment display Advanced alarm observation/display Alarm list display Alarm history display Parts display Parts movement Panel meter display Level display Trend graph Historical trend graph*5 Line graph Bar graph Statistics graph Scatter graph
P.49
P.50
P.51 P.52 P.53

*7
(CF card) (CF card) (CF card) (CF card)
P.54
Required Required (CF card)
*5
*5
P.55
P.56
28
3.1 Functions
1
: Available : Partially available : Not available
Extended function/ Option OS installation
GT15
GT11
*2 Status observation function Advanced recipe function Recipe function Time action function Report function Hard copy Saving files in CF card function Screen design Printing with printer Bar code function Sound output function External I/O function Operation panel function Set overlay screen function Operation log function Document display function Logging function Script function Project script Screen script Object script System monitor function MELSEC-A list editor function Maintenance function FX list editor function Ladder monitor function Q motion monitor function Servo amplifier monitor function Network monitor function CNC monitor function Backup/restore function Maintenance report function
Required
*2
*3 P.56
Required Required (CF card) Required Required (CF card)
CF card CF card P.58

*10
Required Printer unit Required Required Required Sound output unit External I/O unit
P.59
P.58
Required External I/O unit
P.60
Required Required
P.60
Required Required (CF card)
P.62
Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required (CF card)
*9 *9 *14 *15
P.63
Intelligent module monitor function Required Required

Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required
P.64
P.65 CF card
*8
P.66 Battery *1: Function contents, such as the number of setting points and data storage location, vary depending on the model. *2: For details, refer to "Precautions for Use" in section 3.2. *3: "Other devices" refers to necessary options or option units other than the option function board. The devices in parentheses are necessary depending on the purpose of operation. *4: Available only for GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD, GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD. *5: The logging function must be set before the historical trend graph is used.The option function board and the option OS (logging) must be installed. *6: There are structural restrictions for GT1155HS-QSBD and GT1150HS-QLBD. *7: Only the user alarm is available. *8: Only GT1595, GT1585, GT1585V, GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD, GT1575-STBA and GT1575-STBD are available. *9: Not available for GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD and GT1550-QLBD. *10: Only GT1155-QSBD and GT1150-QLBD are available. *11: Up to two channels for GT155 . *12: Only Japanese (supporting Europe) is available for GT10. *13: Only GT1030 is available. *14: Only GT115 -Q BDA is available. *15: Only GT115 -Q BD and GT115 HS-Q BD are available.
3.1 Functions
29
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
Required Required
CF card CF card
P.61
SOFTWARE
Required
Printer unit
P.57
GOT
Function *1
Other devices
Category
Page
Model GT GT10 SoftGOT 1000
3.2 Precautions for Use

Selecting option function board and CF card
(1) When using option functions or extended functions (a) When using GT15 The extended function OS or option OS and the option function board are required for using functions listed in the next page. When installing the extended function OS or option OS on the GOT, be sure to have sufficient space in the user area of a specified drive. For the sufficient space, refer to the next page. When the available space of user area is not enough, select the option function board with add-on memory. The option function board (GT15-FNB) is built in the following GOT.
Item
GT15 All models
Model
Description
Function version D or later*1
*1: For enabling the option function board built in the GOT, the latest standard monitor OS must be installed on the GOT.
The option functions operated with the GT15-FNB can be used without an option function board installed. For using functions operated with the GT15-QFNB( M) or GT15-MESB48M, and for adding more memory to the GT15, install an applicable option function board. An additional option function board can be installed on the GOT with a built-in option function board. (An option function board for the GT11 cannot be installed on the GT15.) For how to check the function version, refer to the following manual. GT15 User's Manual When the option function board is required When using GOTs other than the above When adding more memory to GT15 (GT15-QFNB M required) M) or GT15-MESB-
When using functions operated with the GT15-QFNB ( 48M
(b) When using GT11 The extended function OS or option OS and the option function board are required for using functions listed in the next page. The option function board (GT11-50FNB) is built in the following GOT.
Item
GT11
Model
GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QSBDA GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA
Description
Function version D or later
The option functions operated with the GT11-50FNB can be used without an option function board installed. An option function board for the GT15 cannot be installed on the GT11. (c) When using GT10 Option functions listed in the next page can be used. (Installing an option function board and the option OS or extended function OS are not required.)
30
(d) When using GT SoftGOT1000 Option functions and extended functions listed in the following table can be used. (Installing an option function board and the option OS or extended function OS are not required.)
Size used in user area (KB) Function
Bar code System monitor Report Printer Device name converter (operation log) Stroke font support data Stroke standard font (JPN) Extended function Stroke standard font (JPN) (supporting Hangul) Stroke standard font (China GB) Stroke standard font (China GB) (supporting Hangul) Video/RGB Backup/restore Operator authentication Sound output External I/O/operation panel Maintenance report function Multi-channel *2 Standard font (China GB) Standard font (China Big5) Standard font (Japanese) Stroke font (Japanese) Stroke font (China GB) Stroke font (China Big5) Operation log Document display*2 Logging Recipe Advanced recipe Optional function*1 Object script MELSEC-A ladder monitor MELSEC-FX ladder monitor MELSEC-Q/QnA ladder monitor*2 MELSEC-A list editor MELSEC-FX list editor Intelligent module monitor Network monitor Q motion monitor Servo amplifier monitor CNC monitor Gateway (server, client) Gateway (mail) Gateway (FTP) MES interface *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6: *7: *8:
GT15
84 746 235 1104 800 400 2160 3175 1474 2016 512 820 784 200 100 *3 *3 1280 1920 1280 1037 1248 1680 1218 2048 740 100 1241 360 523 592 1082 1058 1058 384 324 607 524 588 100 100 64 3196*6
GT SoftGOT1000
Disabled Disabled *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 Disabled Disabled *5 *5 Disabled*8 Disabled Disabled *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
GT11
*4 *4 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled *4 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled *4 *4 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
GT10
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled *7 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled M/GT15-MESB48M). Disabled
GT15...Use the option function board (GT15-QFNB/GT15-FNB) or the option function board with add-on memory (GT15-QFNB GT11...Use the option function board (GT11-50FNB). GT15-FNB cannot be used for the multi-channel, MELSEC-Q/QnA ladder monitor, and document display functions. Use GT15-QFNB ( M) or GT15-MESB48M. The installation of the option OS is not required. Install the option OS or extended function OS. In that case, the user area is not used. Mounting of the option function board and installation of the option OS or extended function OS are not required. Use GT15-MESB48M for the MES interface function. 8218KB of the add-on memory (48MB) in the GT15-MESB48M is used for the MES interface function. The option function board is not required. With the keyboard input function, operations equivalent to the ones with the operation panel function can be available.
31
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
(2) Selecting by size used in user area (drive space required for data transfer) The BootOS, standard monitor OS, communication driver, extended function OS, option OS, special data, project data, and others are stored in the system area and user area for the spcecified drive of the GOT.For the BootOS, standard monitor OS and first communication driver stored in the system area of the C drive, checking the data size is not required before installation.However, for the extended function OS, option OS, second communication driver or later, and project data, the data is not transferred when the available space of a transferred drive is not sufficient. The following data are stored in the user area. Extended function OS Project data Option OS Special data Second communication Buffering data driver or later For each data size, refer to the following. Extended function OS and option OS Section 3.2 (1) Second communication driver or later, project data, and special data GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual Buffering data GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual The total size of the extended function OS, option OS, special data, and second communication drive or later must be within the standard memory size.When the total data size including the project data and buffering data used in the user area exceeds the standard memory size*1, the CF card and the option function board with add-on memory are required. The project data must be downloaded to the A or B drive (CF card). Selecting CF card Select the CF card with the memory*2 larger than [the data size required in the user area]. Selecting option function board with add-on memory Select the option function board with add-on memory*2 larger than the difference between [the data size required in the user area] and [the standard memory size*1].
*1: The standard memory size differs depending on the model.For details, refer to "Specification" in section 1.2. *2: The size is a rough indication.
The CF card is available for the following functions of GT15.

Data transfer(also available for this function of GT11) Advanced alarm Alarm history (also available for this function of GT11) Operation log (required) Advanced recipe Recipe (also available for this function of GT11) Logging Document display (required) Historical trend graph Parts display Report (required) Backup/restore (required) Parts movement Hard copy Add-on memory (required) Ladder monitor
32
Compatibility with existing product Project data

(1) Compatibility when changing from GT Designer to GT Designer2 * The project data created with GT Designer is available for GT Designer2. (2) Compatibility when changing GOT900 series to GOT1000 series * Using data of GOT-A900 series in GOT1000 series The project data for GOT900 series is available for GOT1000 series. Using data of GOT-F900 series in GOT1000 series The project data for GOT-F900 series is available for GOT1000 series. For details, refer to "Project Data Conversion Summary (JY997D17601A)".
*: Some data and functions are not available.
Cable
(1) Bus connection cable The bus connection cable for GOT900 series is not available for GOT1000 series. The bus connection cable for GOT1000 series is not available for GOT900 series. (2) RS-422/RS-232 cable The RS-422/RS-232 cable for GOT900 series is not available for GOT1000 series. The RS-422/RS-232 cable for GOT1000 series is not available for GOT900 series.
Panel cutting dimension

(1) Compatibility when changing GOT900 series to GOT1000 series The panel cutting dimension is the same between A985GOT(-V) and GT1585, between A975/ 970GOT(-B) and GT157 hole is not required. GT115 hole. -Q , and F940GOT and GT155 /GT115 . Changing the mounting /GT115 -Q BDQ or
The panel cutting dimension is different between A95
and GT155
BDA. However, the GOTs can be exchanged without changing the mounting
When using multi-channel function with GT15

The multi-channel function monitors multiple FA devices with mounting multiple communication units on a GOT or using the standard interface (GOT built-in RS-232 interface).
Available combinations of connection types

The following shows the available combinations of connection types for the multi-channel function. 1) Bus connection or network connection *1 and serial connection *2 2) Serial connection only
*1: The network connection indicates the following connection types. MELSECNET/H connection MELSECNET/10 connection CC-Link connection Ethernet connection *2: The serial connection indicates the following connection types. Direct CPU connection Computer link connection CC-Link connection (via G4) Microcomputer connection Third party programmable controller connection Temperature controller connection Inverter connection Servo amplifier connection CNC connection (direct CPU connection)
33
GLOSSARY
For details and precautions when changing from GOT900 series to GOT1000 series, access MELFANSweb website.(http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html)
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
Number of connectable channels/mountable units/mountable stages

(1) Number of connectable channels The number of connectable channels differs according to the GOT model. Refer to the following table. (2) Number of mountable units/mountable stages The following describes how to add the interface on a GOT for using the multi-channel function. (a) Mount a communication unit on the extension unit interface. In addition, when adding communication unit on the second stage and third stage, mount a communication unit on the already mounted unit. (b) Mount a communication unit on the extension unit interface to use a GOT with the standard interface (GOT built-in RS-232 interface). The numbers of mountable units and mountable stages differ according to the GOT model. Refer to the following table.
*: Communication units, option units, and GOT functions have restrictions depending on the system configurations.
GT1595/GT1585 GT157 /GT156 GT155
Description
Indicates the maximum number of the communication ports (communication units and standard interfaces) that a GOT can communicate. Only 1 channel can be connected to one GOT for the bus connection and network connection respectively. When the Ethernet communication unit is used for functions*3 other than communications with controllers, the unit is not included in the number of channels. When the standard interface is used for connecting *4 to peripheral devices, the interface is not included in the number of channels.
Max. number of connectable channels (1) Max.number of mountable units
Refer to "Calculation of current consumed by unit for GT15". Indicates the maximum number of units that can be mounted on the extension unit interfaces 1 and 2 of a GOT. Only for the serial communication unit*5 , multiple same units can be mounted. The extention units are included in the number of units. The RS-422 conversion unit is not included in the number of units. Calculate the current consumed by a unit to be mounted. Refer to "Calculation of current consumed by unit for GT15". Indicates the maximum number of stages for the extension unit interfaces 1 and 2 of a GOT. Units*6*7 that occupies 2 slots must be mounted at the first stage. However, when using units shown in*7 ,mount the units at the first stage and mount other units at the second stage or later. Units shown in*8 cannot be mounted on other units. Mount the units at first stage. Refer to "External Dimensions" in section 1.5 and "Mounting unit on interface of GOT for GT15".
(2)
Max. number of mountable stages
3 (2 slots)
3 (1 slot)
*3: Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function *4: Bar code function, FA transparent function, OS installation, project data download *5: GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE *6: GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13 *7: GT15V-75V4, GT15V-75R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT15V-75ROUT *8: GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, GT15-75J61BT13-Z
Communication driver
The communication driver must be installed for each connection type to be used. The communication driver of 2 ch or later is installed in the user area.

The option function board with add-on memory is required for using the multi-channel function. Use an option function board of the GT15-QFNB ( M) or GT15-MESB48M. The GT15-FNB is not available.
34
Mounting unit on interface of GOT for GT15

Extension interface 1
3 3rd stage 2 2nd stage 1 1st stage
GT155 , only the extension interface1 Extension interface 2 (For is available.) For units mounted on the extension interface, up to three stages are available as a total of the communication units and option units. Units that occupies 2 slots must be mounted at the first stage. However, when using the following units, mount the units at the first stage and mount other units at the second stage or later.
GT15V-75V4, GT15V-75R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT15V-75ROUT (One of above units can be mounted to GT1585 or GT1575V)
Unit that occupies 2 slots

Example) GT15-QBUS2
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, GT15-75J61BT13-Z (GT155 is not available.)
2 slots (one stage) are occupied.
Pay attention to the followings when GT15-CFCD is mounted or removed.

An extension unit cannot be mounted on the CF card unit. Mount the CF card unit at the last stage when mounting the extension unit. When mounting the CF card unit on the extension interface 1 (left side), make sure that the number of extension units mounted on the extension interface 2 (right side) is smaller than that on the extension interface 1.Otherwise, the CF card cannot be inserted and removed. The CF card unit must be removed in the indicated direction ( PULL) for avoiding connector damage.
The GOT can be connected to controllers with the serial connection and to peripheral devices, including bar code readers.
Calculation of current consumed by unit for GT15

When multiple units or bar code readers are used, the total of the current consumed by the units or bar code readers must be within the maximum current supplied by a GOT. Design a system with the following values so that the total current is within the maximum current supplied by a GOT.
(1) Max. current supplied by GOT (2) Current consumed by unit or bar code reader
GOT types
GT1595 GT1585 (including GT1585V) GT157 (including GT1575V) GT156 GT155
(3) Calculation example

When the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-R4-9S (three units), and GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway function) are mounted on the GT1575 with a bar code reader (0.12A) connected
Max. current supplied (A)

2.13 1.74 2.2 2.2 1.3
Unit types
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE GT15-RS2T4-9P GT15-J71E71-100 GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13 GT15-J61BT13 Bar code reader GT15-PRN
GT15V-75V4R1, GT15V-75V4, GT15V-75R1
Current consumed (A)
0.275 *1 0.12 0.29 0.33 0.3 0.098 0.224 0.56 0.77 0.56 *2 0.09 0.2 *1 0.11 0.07 0.15 0.08 0.1
3 stage 2 stage 1 stage
GT15-RS4-9S GT15-J71E71-100 Serial connection [4ch] (For the gateway function) GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-9S Serial connection [2ch] Serial connection [3ch] GT15-J71BR13 MELSECNET/H connection [1ch]
GT1575
Bar code reader
GT15V-75ROUT GT15-CFCD GT15-CFEX-C08SET GT15-SOUT GT15-DIO
Max. current supplied by GOT (A)
Total of current consumed (A)

0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104
2.2
The total of the current consumed by units and a bar code reader is within thecurrent supplied by a GOT. The units and a bar code reader are available.
: 0.44A : 0.95A : 0.7A : 0.91A
*2: For using a bar code reader powered via the standard interface, add the current consumption at 5VDC for the bar code reader. (The maximum current is 0.3A.)
35
GLOSSARY
*1: The followings are the values of current consumed by unit itself. GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L GT15V-75V4R1 GT15V-75V4 GT15V-75R1
Standard interface (RS-232 interface built in GOT)
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
The following units cannot mount on other units. Mount the units at first stage.
GOT
License key for GT SoftGOT1000

(1) License key License key is required for using GT SoftGOT1000. The license key includes the following two types.
Model
GT15-SGTKEY-U GT15-SGTKEY-P *1
Connection type
Connection via USB port Connection via parallel port
*1: Not available with the PC CPU module that has no parallel port. Use the GT15-SGTKEY-U.
(b) How to use license key Be sure to connect the license key to GT SoftGOT1000 before monitoring. When monitoring is started without the license key, GT SoftGOT1000 automatically ends in approximately two hours. In addition, be sure to connect the license key to GT SoftGOT1000 during monitoring. When the license key is removed during monitoring, GT SoftGOT1000 automatically ends. (c) Before connecting the license key The OS recognizes a license key as a controller. Therefore, install the system driver (device driver) as in the case of other controllers. The license key is accessed via the system driver. When the system driver is not installed, the license key cannot be accessed. (d) Applicable target of license keys The GT15-SGTKEY-U and GT15-SGTKEY-P are dedicated to GT SoftGOT1000. The license keys are not applicable to GT SoftGOT2. (2) When connecting GT15-SGTKEY-U (a) Cautions for installing/uninstalling system driver Remove GT15-SGTKEY-U before installing/uninstalling the system driver. When installing the system driver with GT15-SGTKEY-U connected, the installation of USB may fails. When the installation fails, uninstall the system driver with the GT15-SGTKEY-U removed, and then install the system driver again. (3) When connecting GT15-SGTKEY-P (a) Available port for GT15-SGTKEY-P GT15-SGTKEY-P can be used with the parallel port mounted on a personal computer by default. The GT15-SGTKEY-P is not applicable to parallel ports extended or connected via a converter. (b) When using GT15-SGTKEY-P with other devices The following devices cannot be used at the same port as that for the GT15-SGTKEY-P. SCSI interface for parallel port Floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM or ZIP drive connected to parallel port Devices with data transfer methods that the specifications are out of the standard specification for the commnunication method via a pararell port (Interlink network, Centronics printer interface, and others). (c) Precautions for connecting GT15-SGTKEY-P Connect the GT15-SGTKEY-P between the printer switching device and a personal computer.
36
(4) When using system driver Use a system driver included in GT Works2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 of Ver 2.25B or later. For using a system driver of Ver 2.25B or earlier, though the GT15-SGTKEY-P can be used, the GT15-SGTKEY-U cannot be used.
37
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
3.3 Overview of Each Function

Hardware specification
Function Clock function Overview Reference Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 12 in GT15 User's Manual [SH080528ENG] Chapter 11 in GT11 User's Manual [JY997D17501]
Adjust Adjusts the time of the GOT clock data to the clock data of a programmable controller CPU.
Manages the clock data of a GOT. The clock data can be selected as a standard for adjusting the time.
Broadcast Adjusts the time of the programmable controller CPU clock data to the clock data of the GOT.
Chapter 13 in GT10 User's Manual [JY997D24701] Chapter 40 in Handy GOT User's Manual [JY997D20101]
Video input
Displays the image taken with a camcorder on a video window. The video window operates independently of other screens. While opening the video window, base screens can be switched.
Camcorder (Channel No.1)

A 1254
B 348
Camcorder (Channel No.2) Camcorder (Channel No.3) Camcorder (Channel No.4)
Chapter 13 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 37 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual [SH080532ENG]
Video window 4 Video window 3 Video window 2 Video window 1
38
Function RGB input/ RGB output
Overview Displays a screen of a personal computer on the GOT and outputs a GOT screen to a commercially-available display. The RGB screen can be used with selecting SVGA (800 600 dots) or (640 480 dots). The RGB screen is displayed on the monitor screen of a GOT by the ON/OFF status of the device (bit device in the word device).
Reference
RGB input
RGB screen
The RGB screen is overlapped on the monitor screen of a GOT by turning on the bit device for displaying the RGB screen.
OFF
Overlap
(The black color of the monitor screen becomes transparent.)
ON
Bit OFF
No overlap
Even when an RGB screen is displayed, the monitor screen operates as well.
RGB output
Chapter 37 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual [SH080532ENG]
When executing the RGB output, set the RGB output in the communication settings.
Backlight shutoff detection function
Detects the backlight shutoff of a LCD and indicates the backlight shutoff with the POWER LED on the front surface of the GOT.
Lit in green Blinks in orange/green Lit in orange
Chapter 19 in GT15 User's Manual [SH080528ENG] Chapter 17 in GT11 User's Manual [JY997D17501] Chapter 47 in Handy GOT User's Manual [JY997D20101]
Normal
Backlight shutoff detected
Screen saving
39
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
Bit ON
D10 b15
b2 b1 b0
Chapter 13 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG]
GOT
Function of GOT main unit

Function FA transparent function Overview Enables a personal computer to read, write, and monitor a sequence program of the MITSUBISHI programmable controller via a GOT with the GOT connected to the programmable controller and the personal computer. Software version applicable to the FA transparent function differs depending on the software.
A 1254 A 1254 B 348 B 348
Reference
Chapter 40 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual [SH080532ENG] Chapter 36 in Handy GOT User's Manual [JY997D20101]
Bus connection cable RS-232/RS-422 cable
RS-232 cable USB cable
The sequence program can be read, written, and monitored.
Multi-channel function
Monitors up to four controllers (four channels), including a programmable controller CPU, a temperature controller, and an inverter, on one GOT with installing multiple communication drivers. For specifications and cautions of the multi-channel function, refer to "Precautions for Use" in section 3.2.
Channel No.1
Bus connection
Channel No.2
The devices of controllers are monitored by installing multiple communication drivers.
OMRON programmable controller connection
Channel No.3
Temperature controller connection
Channel No.4
Servo amplifier connection
40
Function Gateway function
Overview Monitors controllers of various manufacturers on one GOT or personal computer, and sends alarms occurred on the GOT by e-mail. The function supports remote monitoring and remote maintenance of a production site from an office.
Server Server Server
Reference
RS-422 communication
MITSUBISHI programmable controller
Company A programmable controller
Microcomputer board
Ethernet
The communication method is standardized to Ethernet.
Client
MX Component
[Available connection type for gateway function]

Connection type between GOT and programmable controller
Bus connection (MELSEC-Q) *1 Bus connection (MELSEC-QnA/A) *2 Direct CPU connection
Chapter 42 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual [SH080532ENG] GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual [SH080545ENG]
MITSUBISHI programmable Computer link connection (MELSEC-QnA/A) MELSECNET/H connection (programmable controller to controller/motion controller programmable controller network)
MELSECNET/10 connection (programmable controller to *3 programmable controller network)
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) *4 CC-Link connection (via G4) Ethernet connection Direct CPU connection
MELSECNET/H connection (programmable controller to programmable controller network) MELSECNET/10 connection (programmable controller to *3 programmable controller network)
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) *4 Ethernet connection
Third party programmable controller Microcomputer board, personal computer, and others (microcomputer connection) Temperature controller connection
*1: Be sure to use GT15-QBUS/GT15-QBUS2. *2: Be sure to use GT15-ABUS/GT15-ABUS2. *3: When using the MELSECNET/10 connection, use the MELSECNET/H communication unit.The MELSECNET/10 communication unit is not available. *4: When using the CC-Link connection, use the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BR13-Z) is not available.
41
GLOSSARY
MITSUBISHI CNC (MELDAS C6/C64) connection
FUNCTION
Required software is MX Component only.
SOFTWARE
GOT
Function MES interface function
Overview Sends the SQL text from the GOT to the database in a server computer connected via the Ethernet connection, and writes device values of the GOT to the database or reads database values to set the values for the GOT device. When a GOT communicates directly with a server computer, the gateway equipment for communications is not required. The function enables reducing the maintenance cost and improving reliability.
Reference
Server (Database)
Chapter 15 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 43 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual [SH080532ENG] GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual [SH080654ENG]
SQL
Communication gateway
Communication gateway equipment is not required.
GOT
Controller
42
Screen design
Function Base screen Superimpose window display Overlap window display
Basic screen for screen display on a GOT.
1
Overview Reference
Base screen
GOT
Production status screen1

A 1254 B 348
2
SOFTWARE
Superimpose window

A1254 B 348
Overlap window
Window that pops up on the base screen. The window can be moved or closed manually.
*For GT10, only the base screen is available.
Line A Line B
Target Actual 500 488 300 225

Target change
Line A Line B
Target Actual 500 488 300 225

Target change
Target setting screen
Line A Line B
500 300 Back
You are going to cancel the present target and set a new target.Are you sure? YES NO
A dialog window such as guiding an operator to confirm the operation can be created and displayed.
43
GLOSSARY
Dialog window display
Displays user-customized system messages and user-created messages on the GOT with dialog windows.
FUNCTION
Window that is overlapped on the displayed base screen. When switching the superimpose window, a part of the base screen can be changed.
Function Figure drawing
Overview Displays figures drawn by the user, characters, and the BMP, DXF, and IGES format data imported with the drawing software on the GOT. (JPEG is available only for GT15 and GT SoftGOT1000, and IGES only for GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11.)
Reference
BMP, JPEG and other files
Figure
Character
Font
Displays a wide variety of fonts, including the standard font compatible with Unicode 2.1 and the fonts available for Windows .
Standard font
*1 *1
HQ font
TrueType font
Windows font
Stroke font *2
*1: Not available for GT1020. *2: Not available for GT11 and GT10.
Kanji region
Some Chinese characters look different even with synonyms depending on the region where Chinese characters are used (Japanese kanji, simplified Chinese or traditional Chinese). With the function, Chinese characters in each region can be displayed. (For GT11, Japanese kanji and simplified Chinese can be displayed by installing an applicable standard font. Traditional Chinese cannot be displayed.)
Japanese
Simplified Chinese Mincho
Traditional Chinese Gothic
Object superimposition (layers)
Superimposes two types of sheets (layers) and displays the sheets as one screen. Objects can be superimposed with layers.
Front layer
Actual view
Back layer
44
Function Screen switching
Overview Switches the screen displayed on a GOT with the device value for switching screen.
Switching base screens
Reference
Change the device value
Device for switching base screens

D100 10 D100 20
Switching overlap window 1

The window screen No.1 is displayed.
13451
Station No. switching
Switches the station No. of a controller to be monitored by setting the device value for switching station No, and displays the object corresponding to the station No. is displayed. When the same kind of multiple machines are connected to the network, the multiple machines can be monitored on the same monitor screen.
Line A Station No.1 Monitoring D100 Output 40
Station No.0 (Master station)
Output D100 40 Station No.2
Monitoring host station Line B Monitoring D100 Station No.1 Output D100 100
Station No.0 (Master station)
Station No.2
Output
100
Station No. D101 switching device
Change the monitor target to station No.1.
45
GLOSSARY
Station No. D100 switching device
FUNCTION
Device for switching Overlap window 1
D120
D120
The window screen that number is the same as the screen switching device appears. ("0" is deleted)
SOFTWARE
GOT
Base screen 10
Base screen 20
The base screen that number is the same as the screen switching device appears.
Function Language switching function
Overview Switches the language of a comment to be displayed by setting the device value for language switching when multiple languages is registered in each column of a comment group.
Reference
Emergency stop limit switch operated.

Switched
Japanese
Password setting
English
Sets passwords for displays, operations, upload operations, and utility operations of objects and screens. The setting of each password restricts the user for the operation.
Security level: 2 Security level: 10
Line No.1
A1254 A 1254 B 348 B 348
Cancel
Line No.1
A1254 A1254 B 348 B 348
Set a password for a high security level.
Objects are displayed according to the changed security level.
System information
Controls GOT operations, including erasing screens and disabling the key input, from a controller and notifies the GOT status to a controller according to the data written to the device.
The controller controls GOT operations.
D10.b1=OFF
D10.b1=ON
The forced screen saver enable signal is turned on.
The change of the forced screen saver enable signal is checked, and the displaydisappears.
The GOT notifies the GOT status to the controller.
125
Base screen 1
Base screen 5
D20
The base screen is changed from No.1 to No.5.
The GOT operation status is written to the write device.
46
Function Communication settings
Overview
Reference Chapter 3 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 10 in GT15 User's Manual [SH080528ENG]
Sets the connection type and the communication interface to communicate between a GOT and a controller.
Extension interface
Standard interface
Communication interface setting (Example with the multi-channel function)

Bus connection
Chapter 10 in GT11 User's Manual [JY997D17501] Chapter 11 in GT10 User's Manual [JY997D24701] Chapter 3 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG]
Communication driver setting
Programmable controller CPU
Startup logo
Changes the logo displayed when starting the GOT to any BMP screens.
At the GOT startup
Original
The set BMP screen is displayed.
Comment registration
Basic comment display example The comment set for the comment No. corresponding to the device value is displayed with the comment display function.
Basic comment
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5
During operation Conveyer stopped Inspecting Emergency stopped Complete Production line status Operating Production line status
Conveyer stopped
D100=1
D100=2
D100=5
Production line status Complete
Display comment No.1
Comment group display The comment set for the comment No. corresponding to the device value is displayed with the comment display function, and the column of the displayed comment can be switched with the language switching device.
D100=2 (Specify a comment No.
to be displayed.)
Comment group No.1

No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 Operating Conveyer stopped Inspecting Stopped with error Complete
D200=1 (Specify the column No.)
D100=2 D200=2
Column No.1 Column No.2 Specify a column No. with the language switching device.
Display the comment No.2 of the column No.1.
Display the comment No.2 of the column No.2.
47
GLOSSARY
Conveyer stopped
Registers character strings created by the user as a comment. The registered comments can be displayed with multiple object functions. The comment includes the basic comment and the comment group. (Available font for the basic comment is only 16dot(Standard/HQ Mincho).)
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
Function Part registration
Overview Registers figures created by the user as parts. The registered parts can be displayed with object functions.
When displaying BMP/JPEG files set as parts
Reference
Store BMP/JPEG file.
Memory card
Insert a memory card to a GOT.
* The memory card is not available for GT10.
Display the BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card as parts.
When displaying registered parts
Download parts registered with GT Designer2 to a GOT.
Display the registered parts.
Data operation function
Executes the operations set in the data operation for the word device values, and monitors or writes with the operated values.
When using the data operation function in numerical input function Monitored device: D101
D100 5000 Expected productive output D101 1000 Completed productive output
Production complete rate
20
Expression of operation
D101 D100 100 Display the complete rate corresponding to expectation.
Offset function
Switches and monitors multiple devices with setting only one device.
When switching display from Line 1 to Line 3 D100=326 D300=442
Line 1 Line 3 Line 3
Result
326
Result
326
Result
442
The result of Line 1 (D100) is monitored.
Switch a Line to be monitored.
The result of Line 3 (D300) is monitored.
48
Function Security function
Overview Limit the screen displays depending on the security level of the user. The authentic method for changing security levels includes the security level authentication and the operator authentication. Operator authentication The method authenticates the user with the operator name and password corresponding to the security level when the security level is changed.
Security level: 2 Security level: 10
Reference
Set an operator name and a password for a high security level.
Objects are displayed according to the changed security level.
*1: Not available for GT11 and GT10. Security level authentication The method authenticates the user with the password for each security level when the security level is changed.
Changing the security level from 0 to 4
Security level: 0
Line 1 control screen
Production volume
Password
Display the screen for changing the security level.

Security level: 0 4 Security level: 4
Line 1 control screen
Production volume 150 St. Mt.
Password
Input the password of security level 4.
Objects limited by the security function are displayed.
Lamp display
Bit lamp
X10=ON X10=OFF
RUN
ST.
ON
OFF
49
GLOSSARY
Changes lamp colors according to the ON/OFF status of the bit device or the word device value.
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
Function Touch switch
Overview Turns bit devices on or off and switches the GOT screens with touching the screen.
Reference
ST.
RUN
M10:OFF
M10:ON
Numerical display/ Numerical input
Displays the data stored in devices of a controller as numeric values on a GOT or writes any value from a GOT to devices of a controller.
Numerical display
D100 349 D100 722
D100=349
D100=722
Numerical input
123
1234
Use touch switches or a key window to input a value.
Data list
Displays multiple word device values in a list. The line number and ruled lines of a list are automatically displayed.
No . Line 1 2 3 4
Plan
Output Fault 800 250 600 850 2 0 1 3
Line Line Line Line
1 2 3 4
1000 500 800 900
No. Line
Plan
Output Fault
1 2 3 4
Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4
1000 500 800 900
800 250 600 850
2 0 1 3
D10:1000 D20: 500 D30: 800 D40: 900
D11:800 D21:250 D31:600 D41:850
D12: 2 D22: 0 D32: 1 D42: 3
50
Function
Overview
Reference
1
ASCII display/ Recognizes the data stored in the word device as the character code. The ASCII input function displays character strings or writes the input characters to the word device with the character code.
ASCII display
GOT
D ABC
QX 40
QX 42
ASCII input
AB C
D10 0000 H D11 0000 H
D10 4241 H (BA) D11 4443 H (DC)
Clock display
Displays the date and time on a GOT. Chapter 7 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG]
05/08/16
13:48
* GT15, GT11, and GT1030: The clock data of a GOT or programmable controller CPU is used.
GT SoftGOT1000: The clock data of a personal computer is used. GT1020: The clock data of a programmable controller CPU is used.
51
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
Use touch switches or a key window to input characters.
Use the write key (key code: 000DH) to write the input characters with the character code.
SOFTWARE
D12 5851 H (XQ) D13 3420 H (4 ) D14 0030 H (0)
D12 5851 H (XQ) D13 3420 H (4 ) D14 0032 H ( (2)
Function Comment display
Overview Displays a comment corresponding to the ON/OFF status of the bit device or corresponding to the word device value.
Display comments with the ON/OFF of the bit device.
X10=OFF Pro. line con. Conv. st. X10=ON Pro. line con. During oper.
Reference
Comment when the bit device is OFF
Comment when the bit device is ON
Display comments with the word device value

D100
1
D100
10
D100 100 Pro. line con. Completed
Pro. line con. During oper.
Pro. line con. Conv. st.
Display the comment of comment No.1.
Advanced alarm observation/ display
Function that is more advanced than conventional alarm functions (system alarm and user alarm). Comments for an alarm can be displayed in three hierarchies (higher, middle and general hierarchies). When an alarm occurs in a large system, details of the alarm occurrence can be displayed.
Display of higher alarms The alarms occurred on the factory lines are displayed.
Factory Line 1
Occurred Comment Line 1 error 04/6/1 Line 2 error 04/6/1
Higher hierarchy Lower hierarchy
Check
Line 2
Touch!
Equipment A
Equipment B
Switching from higher to middle hierarchy Display of middle hierarchy alarms The alarms occurred on line 2 are displayed.
Occurred Comment 04/6/1 Equipment A error 04/6/1 Equipment B error
Check
Power supply module
Drive module
Control module
Power supply module
Drive module
Control module
Touch!
Error occurrence
Error Error occurrence occurrence
Switching from middle hierarchy to general hierarchy Display of general alarms The module on which the alarm occurred actually on the equipment B is displayed with the alarm details.
Occurred Comment 04/6/1 Power supply module error 04/6/1 Control module error
Check
52
Function Alarm list display
Overview Displays user-created alarms (user alarm) and system errors (system alarm). (Only the user alarm is available for GT10.)
User alarm display Use the function to display the alarm created by the user.
Reference
M100 M101
Temp. error Fuse error
M100 Temp. error Replace the fuse of the M101 Fuse with error power module new one.
Detail
Detail
System alarm display Use the function to display the controller, GOT, and network errors.
Error occurrence
400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30 9 AC down error 803 Transient error
Alarm history display
Alarm occurred
Up
Down
Check
Occurred Time 04/03/01 10:25 04/03/01 12:05
Message Fuse error Oil error
Restore 11:25
Check 10:45
X0:OFF
ON
The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are displayed when X0 is turned on.
Alarm detail display

Supply oil to the arm of Line 1.
Up
Down
Check
Alarm details, corrective actions for errors, and others are displayed.
Alarm checked time/System restoration
Up
Down
Check
Occurred Time 04/03/01 10:25 04/03/01 12:05
Message Fuse error Oil error
Restore 11:25 12:45
Check 10:45 12:10
53
GLOSSARY
After restoration, X0:ON OFF
The restoration time is displayed. Use the touch switch for displaying the alarm history to display the alarm checked time.
The window for displaying details is any of the comment window, base screen, or window screen.
Saves the time and messages of the alarms occurrence in the GOT built-in memory and displays the saved data as a history list when conditions of the device specified for alarm detection are met (Bit ON to OFF/word device range).
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
Touch!
GOT
M100 : OFF M101 : OFF
ON ON
Function Parts display
Overview Displays registered parts according to the device status.

D100 = 1 D100 = 10 D100 = 100
Reference Chapter 9 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG]
Display the part No.1.
Parts movement
Changes the parts position and displays parts (movement display) by setting the word device value.
When executing parts movement display with specifying [Point]
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
A part is displayed at the point 1 position.
Move to point 2.
Move to point 3.
D10:1
D10:2
D10:3
Panelmeter display
Displays the word device value as a value relative to the set upper and lower limit values in a meter (move of the meter needle).
D100=1000
10 0 Ammeter 20 0 Ammeter
D100=2000
10 20
D100=3000
10 0 Ammeter 20
Level display
Fills the specified range corresponding to the percentage of the word device value to the set upper and lower limit values.
D100=0
100 75 50 25 0
D100=50
100 75 50 25 0
D100=100
100 75 50 25 0
54
Function Trend graph
Overview Continuously collects the word device data and displays the collected data in a trend graph.
D10=200 D11=100
200 100 0 200 100 0
Reference
1
D10=150 D11=100
The data is displayed to the end of the graph display range in order.
Historical trend graph
Displays the device data collected with the logging function in a trend graph in time sequence.
Usually, the collected data is displayed in trend graph. Display the past data. Display the latest data.
Graph display range Data collected by the logging function
Graph display range
Graph display range
400 200 0
400 200 0
Bar graph
Collects the word device data and displays the collected data in a bar graph. Chapter 10 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG]
400 200 0 -200 -400
400 200 0 -200 -400
100 400 200
-200 200 400
55
GLOSSARY
D10 = 100 D11 = 50 D12 = 200 D13 = 150
D10 = 150 D11 = 100 D12 = 250 D13 = 350
Line graph
Collects multiple word device data in block and displays the collected data in a line graph.
FUNCTION
Graph Update
Graph Update
Graph Update
SOFTWARE
The data is collected continuously when the following graph is displayed by scrolling.
GOT
Function Statistics graph
Overview Displays the data ratio of collected multiple word devices to the total data value in a statistics pie/bar graph.
Statistics pie graph
Reference
D10 D20 D30
33 33 34
D10 D20 D30
12 76 12
Statistics bar graph
D10 D20 D30
33 33 34
D10 D20 D30
12 76 12
Scatter graph
Displays two word device values as points on an x-y coordinate system on a graph.
X device: D100 Y device: D200
(300,200)
(200,100)
400 300 200 100
400 300 200 100 0 0 100 200 300
400 300 200 100 0 0 100 200 300
100
200
300
Status observation function
Turns a device on/off and writes a device value when the specified conditions are met. Chapter 11 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG]
D100: 0 100
Condition (X10: ON) satisfied
Write
X10: ON
56
Function Advanced recipe function
Overview Function that is more advanced than the recipe function. The available number of recipe settings, device points or records is increased. In addition, the advanced recipe setting and the record are combined to create flaxible recipe data.
When changing only one of materials
Cookie Flour Butter Sugar Egg
Small Large amount amount
Reference
1
: 100 : 50 : 80 : 60
: 50 : 25 : 40 : 30
Cookies are being produced
Cookie Cake
Flour Butter Suger Egg
100 50 80 60
Butter Suger
Change the amount of butter only.
D10 (Flour) D11 (Butter) D12 (Sugar) D13 (Egg)
:100 : 50 : 80 : 60
25
Flour
Egg
Recipe function
Stores data (device values) such as blend and processing conditions of materials in a GOT and writes/reads the required data from/to the GOT to/from a programmable controller.
Change the amounts of used materials depending on the product to be made.
Cookie Flour: 100 Butter: 50 Sugar: 80 Egg: 60 Cake Flour: 120 Butter: 65 Sugar: 90 Egg: 40
Cookies are being produced

Flour Butter Sugar Egg
The product to be made is changed from the cookie to the cake.
D10 (Flour): 100 120 D11 (Butter): 50 65 D12 (Sugar): 80 90 D13 (Egg): 60 40
100 50 80 60
Cookie Cake
Time action function
Turns the bit device on/off and writes the value to the word device at the set day or time. The function is enabled with the day or time of the GOT.
The set device is turned on on Monday morning and turned off on Friday evening.
On Monday morning On Friday evening
OFF
M10
ON
M10
ON
OFF
M10 is turned on.
M10 is turned off.
Report function
Collects the data of the production management and status, and then prints the collected data. The following data can be printed with the function. Word device value Comment corresponding to the device status
05/11/25 16:53:24 Line MC-1 MC-2 MC-1 Operation status RUN RUN RUN RUN HALT RUN RUN Production 10 20 60 80 10 80 90
Comment corresponding to the device status
Word device value
* The following communication units cannot be mounted on the printer unit. Bus connection unit (thinned type): GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L MELSECNET/10 communication unit: GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z CC-Link communication unit: GT15-75J61BT13-Z
57
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
Function Hard copy function
Overview Prints the monitor screen currently displayed on the GOT with a printer or saves the monitor screen currently displayed on the GOT to a memory card in the BMP/JPG file format. The BMP/JPEG files saved in the memory card can be used for various documents on a personal computer.
GOT
Line A production Line A pro. situ.
Reference
Printer
The currently displayed monitor screen is printed.

Screen operation
Line A production
Save the currently displayed monitor screen in the BMP/JPEG format.
Memory card Personal computer (Edit) Printer
The monitor screen can be used in various documents.
* The following communication units cannot be mounted on the printer unit. Bus connection unit (thinned type): GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L MELSECNET/10 communication unit: GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z CC-Link communication unit: GT15-75J61BT13-Z
External I/O function
Executes external inputs and external outputs (lamp and relay) with the external I/O unit. When using the external I/O function, the setting of GT Designer2 is not required.
External I/O unit
External input of up to 128 points is available.
External output ofup to 16 points isavailable.
Push button, operation panel, and others.
Lamp or relay
Operation panel function
With the external I/O unit, input operations, including the touch input, numerical input, and screen switching, can be operated with an operation panel. When using the operation panel function, the operation panel must be set with GT Designer2.
External I/O unit
X0=ON Press the key that are set to turn on X0.
* With the keyboard input function, operations equivalent to the ones with the operation panel function can be available for GT SoftGOT1000.
58
Function Bar code function
Overview Connects the bar code reader to a GOT to print the data read by the bar code reader with a printer or to write the read data to a controller. The bar code reader is connected to RS-232 interface of a GOT.
Read data "123456789"
D0 D1 9 (00 H) 2 (32 H) 4 (34 H) 6 (36 H) 8 (38 H) SP (20 H) (09 H) 1 (31 H) 3 (33 H) 5 (3 5H) 7 (37 H) 9 (39 H) Number of read bytes
Reference
Bar code
D2 D3 D4
Storage data
123456789
GOT
D5
Read data 1 31 H 2 32 H 3 33 H 4 34 H 5 35 H 6 36 H 7 37 H 8 38 H 9 39 H
Terminator CR 0D H
M0 OFF
ON
Operation will stop.
The specified sound file is output when set conditions are met (When M0 turns on.).
59
GLOSSARY
Sound output function
Outputs sounds with speakers connected to the GOT. The sound output is applicable to the following functions. Touch switch function Status observation function Time action function For using the sound output function with the GOT, register sound files on the GOT with the settings in this section.
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
Function Set overlay screen function
Overview Calls other base screens or window screens to place on a basic screen and displays the called screens as one screen. When setting the same objects on multiple screens, the memory capacity can be saved.
Production status screen1 Production status screen1
RUN ST.
Reference
Basic screen (Base screen 1)

RUN ST.

RUN ST.
Called screen (B-10: Base screen 10)
Basic screen (Base screen 2)
Create the screen for touch switches and call the created screen on each screen.
Document display function
Enables displaying documents created with applications, including Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel, on the GOT. Documents, including specifications and manuals, can be displayed on the GOT. Therefore, documents can be used on a screen for troubleshooting, and documents for operations can be displayed during monitoring.
Documents for operating switches and others are displayed on the GOT.
60
Function Operation log function
Overview Saves GOT operation data by the user in a memory card as a history. When troubles occur at production sites, the operation history can be used to identify the cause of the troubles. The saved operation history can be checked by the following methods. Display the operation history with the GOT utility. Save the operation history as a CSV file or Unicode text file and display the saved operation history on a personal computer.
Reference
PRODUCTION LINE LINE A 5 5 8 LINE B 1 9 7
Switch the screen to the base screen 10.

SOFTWARE
Date 10:40
Change Target LINE A 6 0 0 LINE B 3 0 0
Screen -
Details Switching the screen
Before -
After Base screen 10
Change the value by entering numerical value.
Set the changed value.

Date 10:40 10:45 Screen Details Switching the screen Before After Base screen 10 700
Base screen 10 Entering numeric value 600
Switch the screen to the base screen 20.

Date 10:40 10:45 Screen Details Switching the screen Switching the screen Before After Base screen 10 700 Base screen 20
Base screen 10 Entering numeric value 600
10:50:00 PRODUCTION LINE LINE A 5 6 3 LINE B 1 9 9
61
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
GOT
Function Logging function
Overview Collects and stores device values of a controller at an arbitrary timing or intervals. The collected data can be displayed as a historical trend graph. The collected data is also displayed on a personal computer with saving the data as a CSV file or Unicode text file.
Reference
Logging data DAY/TIME 2005/03/26 10:30:00 2005/03/26 10:30:10 2005/03/26 10:30:20 2005/03/26 10:30:30 Line 1 150 152 158 170 Line 2 100 98 95 92 Line 3 250 260 270 280
Script function
Controls a more complex GOT display with creating GOT's original program (script). Controlling the GOT display with the script function drastically reduces the load on the system side (controllers) display.
Example) Setting the interlock function to touch switches
Running
Running
Ready
Run/Stop
Ready
Run/Stop
When the Run/Stop key is turned on without the Ready key When the Ready and Run/Stop keys are turned on, the turned on, the Running lamp does not light. Running lamp lights.
* The object script function is not available for GT11.
62
Debug
Function System monitor function Overview Reference Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 2 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG] MELSEC-A list editor function Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 4 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG] MELSEC-FX list editor function Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 5 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG]
Monitors and tests devices of a programmable controller CPU and the buffer memory of an intelligent function module with a dedicated screen. Preparing a debugging screen is not required for checking devices.
Edits the sequence program of the ACPU in list format. Programs can be easily changed on GOT at worksites.
Edits the sequence program of the FXCPU in list format. Programs can be easily changed on GOT at worksites.
63
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
Function Ladder monitor function
Overview
Reference Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 3 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG]
Monitors the sequence program of a programmable controller CPU in the ladder format with a dedicated screen. With the ladder monitor function, the cause of errors can be investigated on the GOT.
Intelligent module monitor function
Monitors the buffer memory of an intelligent function module and changes the data with a dedicated screen. The signal status of I/O modules can also be monitored.
Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 6 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG]
Q motion monitor function
Sets the servo monitoring and parameter of a motion controller CPU (Q series) with a dedicated screen.
Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 8 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG]
64
Function Servo amplifier monitor function
Overview
Reference Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 9 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG]
Enables various monitor functions, parameter changes, test operations, and others for a servo amplifier with a dedicated screen.
Chapter 7 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG] CNC monitor function Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 10 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual[SH080544ENG]
65
GLOSSARY
Monitors the position display, alarm diagnosis, tool offset parameter, program data, and others equivalent to those for the MELDAS dedicated display with a dedicated screen.
FUNCTION
Network monitor function
Monitors the network status of MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET( ), and MELSECNET/B with a dedicated screen.
SOFTWARE
GOT
Function Backup/ restore function
Overview Saves (backs up) the setting data, including a sequence program, parameters, setting values, for a controller connected to the GOT to a memory card installed in the GOT, and restores the saved data to the controller if required. The system can be backed up/restored without a personal computer.
Back up the setting data of a controller. Memory card
Reference Chapter 14 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) [SH080530ENG] Chapter 11 in GOT1000 Series Extended/ Option Functions Manual [SH080544ENG]
Restore the saved setting data of the controller.
Maintenance report function
Automatically counts the backlight energization time (number of times for holding down the touch key and writing to the built-in flash memory), the maintenance time can be indicated in two stages.
First notification Second notification
System alarm occurred
System alarm occurred
Line A production
Line A production
Chapter 16 in GT15 User's Manual [SH080528ENG]
Maintenance time of a backlight is approaching.
Maintenance time of a backlight has arrived.
66
4. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION
The GOT1000 series can connect to various FA devices including the MITSUBISHI programmable controller. Select a device to be connected to the GOT.
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.2 Other MITSUBISHI controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 4.4 Microcomputer connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 4.5 Temperature Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 4.6 Other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 4.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
67
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.1 Connection type
Feature of each connection type
Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Feature Enables the quick response with touch switches equivalent to that with push buttons. Enables connecting to the MELSEC-Q/QnA/A/FX series3 at the lowest cost. Enables easily connecting the GOT to a programmable controller with the serial communication.
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 connections (programmable Enables using multiple GOTs as remote control terminals. controller to programmable controller network) CC-Link connection (ID) Enables connecting the GOT as an intelligent device station in a CC-Link system. CC-Link connection (via G4) Enables connecting the GOT to a CC-Link system via the AJ65BT-G4-S3. Enables the remote maintenance from offices at production sites with connecting Ethernet connection the GOT to the Ethernet system.
Max. number of connectable GOTs for connecting to QCPU

[Connection type]
25 units 5 units 1 unit 2 units
50 units
75 units
100 units
125 units
Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection

MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (optical loop) MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (coaxial bus)
63 units 31 units
CC-Link connection (ID station) CC-Link connection (via G4) Ethernet connection
26 units(5 units or less are recommended for transient transmission.)

1 unit
128 units (16 units or less are recommended.)
68
Max. installation distance between GOT and QCPU
500m
[Connection type]
1000m
Bus connection Direct CPU connection (RS-232) Direct CPU connection (RS-422) Computer link connection (RS-232) Computer link connection (RS-422)
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (optical loop) MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (coaxial bus)
37m 3m
GOT
30.5m 15m 1200m
2
SOFTWARE
1000m (distance between stations) 500m (distance between stations) 1200m 1230m 100m (Max. segment length)
CC-Link connection (ID station) CC-Link connection (via G4) Ethernet connection
3
FUNCTION
4
5
6
7
GLOSSARY
69
Connectable models
Series Model GT15/GT11 Connection type
Direct Bus Computer connection*3 CPU link connection MELSEC NET/H*1 MELSEC NET/10*1 CC-Link (ID)*1 CC-Link (via G4) Ethernet *1
GT SoftGOT1000 Connection type

Direct Computer Bus CPU link connection connection MELSEC NET/H MELSEC NET/10 CC-Link (ID) CC-Link (via G4) Ethernet
GT10
Connection type
Direct Computer CPU link connection
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU MELSEC-Q Q06HCPU series Q12HCPU (Q mode) Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25G remote I/O station QJ72BR15 Q02CPU-A MELSEC-Q Q02HCPU-A series Q06HCPU-A (A mode) Q2ACPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ACPU-S1 series Q3ACPU (QnACPU type) Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Q2ASCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 series Q2ASHCPU (QnASCPU type) Q2ASHCPU-S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 MELSEC-A A1NCPU series A1NCPUP21 (AnCPU type) A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU-S1 A2NCPUP21-S1 A2NCPUR21-S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 A2USCPU A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU MELSEC-A A2SCPU series (AnSCPU type) A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU-S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 series A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24-PRF A2CJCPU-S3 A1FXCPU
USB connection
*2
*1: Available only for GT15. *2: Available only when GTSoftGOT1000 is installed on the PC CPU module. *3: Available only for GT15, GT115 -Q BDQ, and GT115 -Q BDA.
70
Connectable models
Series Model GT15/GT11 Connection type
Bus connection*3 Direct Computer CPU link connection MELSEC NET/H*1 MELSEC NET/10*1 CC-Link (ID)*1 CC-Link (via G4) Ethernet *1
GT SoftGOT1000 Connection type

Direct Computer MELSEC Bus CPU link NET/H connection connection MELSEC NET/10 CC-Link (ID) CC-Link (via G4)
GT10
Connection type Direct Computer CPU Ethernet link connection
The GOT model to be used differs depending on the connection type.

Series GT11 Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection RS-232 connection GT10 RS-422 connection GT115 GT115 -Q -Q BD BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA GOT model to be used
GT1030-LBD2/GT1030-LBDW2, GT1020-LBD2/GT1020-LBDW2 GT1030-LBD/GT1030-LBDW, GT1020-LBD/GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW (For GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW, MELSEC-FXCPU connection is available only.)
71
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
Q172CPU Q173CPU Motion Q172CPUN controller Q173CPUN CPU Q172HCPU (Q series) Q173HCPU Motion A273UCPU controller A273UHCPU CPU A273UHCPU-S3 (A series) A373UCPU (Large-sized type) A373UCPU-S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU-S3 A171SCPU-S3N Motion A171SHCPU controller A171SHCPUN CPU A172SHCPU (A series) (Small-sized type) A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 FX0S FX0N FX1S FX1N MELSEC-FX FX1NC series FX2N FX2NC FX3U FX3UC
SOFTWARE
GOT
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.2 Bus connection

GOTs connected distance
5
GOT
System configuration
37m
1) QCPU (Q mode)/ Motion controller CPU (Q series)

Bus connection unit Bus connection cable or Max. number of GOTs connected
QCPU Motion controller CPU (Q series)
+
GT15-QC B GT15-QC BS
GT15-QBUS *1 GT15-QBUS2 *1
GT15 GT15-75QBUSL*1 Max. connection distance GT15-75QBUS2L*1
37 m
Built in GOT
GT11
$ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3
&
Mounted on main base unit
License key for GT SoftGOT1000 (PC CPU module*3) + License key for GT SoftGOT1000
*3: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller on the same main base unit.
2) QnA/ACPU
QnA/ACPU
Bus connection unit
or
Max. number of GOTs connected
GT15-ABUS *2 GT15-ABUS2*2
*2 GT15 GT15-75ABUSL Max. connection *2 GT15-75ABUS2L distance
For details on the bus connection system, refer to "Details of bus connection" in section 4.1.3.
GT15-C NB GT15-C EXSS-1 GT15-AC B GT15-C BS GT15-A1SC B GT15-J2C B GT15-A1SC NB
36.6m
Built in GOT
GT11
3) Motion controller CPU (A series)

Bus connection unit Max. number of GOTs connected
Motion controller CPU (A series)
or
GT15-ABUS *2 GT15-75ABUSL*2 GT15 Max. connection *2 GT15-ABUS2*2 GT15-75ABUS2L distance
36.6m
Built in GOT
GT15-C NB GT15-A1SC B GT15-AC B GT15-C EXSS-1 GT15-A370C B-S1 GT15-C BS GT15-A370C B
GT11
*1: Use GT15-QBUS(2) for the following functions.GT15-75QBUS(2)L is not available. Video/RGB display, RGB output, printer output, Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function *2: Use GT15-ABUS(2) for the following functions.GT15-75ABUS(2)L is not available. Video/RGB display, RGB output, printer output, Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function

Series GT11 Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection GT115 GT115 -Q -Q BD BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA GOT model to be used
72
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.2 Bus connection
Precautions Other precautions
For the cable configuration of GT15-C EXSS-1, refer to "External Dimensions" in section 1.5. For the video/RGB display, RGB output, Ethernet download, gateway function, and MES interface function, use the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2). The GT15-75QBUS(2)L and GT15-75ABUS(2)L are not available. When connecting multiple GOTs, the GOT1000 series, GOT-A900 series, GOT800 series and A77GOT cannot be connected together. For connecting the GOT to multiple CPUs (Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU), use CPUs with the function version B or later. When connecting to Q00JCPU of MELSEC-Q series (Q mode) When using the bus extension connector box, mount it on the extension base unit. (The bus extension connector box cannot be mounted on the main base unit.) When connecting to Q4ARCPU of MELSEC-QnA series (QnACPU type) For the redundant Q4ARCPU system, connect to redundant extension base unit A68RB (version B or later) at the last stage via the bus connection. When connecting to A1SJCPU, A1SJCPU-S3, and A1SJHCPU of MELSEC-A series (AnSCPU type) When using the extension base unit, the bus connection is disabled. When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172CPU or Q173CPU Use the motion controller CPU with the following production numbers. Q172CPU with K******* or later, Q173CPU with J******* or later For Q172 or Q173CPU For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later For Q172CPUN or Q173CPUN For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later When connecting to motion controller CPU (A series) (small-sized type) When using the extension base unit, use the A168B. For other precautions for the bus connection , refer to "Details of bus connection" in section 4.1.3.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of bus connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 2 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
For restrictions and precautions on controllers connected to a GOT, refer to the manual for each controller.
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.2 Bus connection
73
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.3 Details of bus connection

When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series)
x. num Ma
r of GOTs be
nec con ted
GOT connection conditions

Number of GOTs connected
Mounting distance between main base *1 unit and first GOT
System configuration Connection distance 0m 13.2m 37m
GOT
Main base unit Extension base unit
13.2m or less
Cable
*1
Max. 13.2m
1
Main base unit
Bus extension connector box *2
Extension base unit
GOT
13.2m or more
Cable
*3
Max. 37m
Main base unit
GOT
Extension base unit
Intermediary GOT
2 4
Terminal GOT
2 5
13.2m or less
Cable
*1
Cable
2
*3
Cable
Max. 13.2m
Max. 37m
2 to 5
Cable
Main base unit
1
GOT
Bus extension connector box *2
Extension base unit
Intermediary GOT
2 4
Terminal GOT
2 5
*5
13.2m or more
Cable
1
Max. 37m
Cable
Cable
*3
*1: When the extension base unit is used, the extension cable length (between the base units) is included. For the cable between the main base unit and extension base unit, refer to Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEC-Q (Catalog) (L(NA)-08033E). *2: When the first GOT is mounted 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension connector box is required. Without the extension base unit : Mount the bus extension connector box to the main base unit. With the extension base unit : Mount the bus extension connector box to the last stage of the extension base unit. (The bus extension connector box cannot be mounted to the main base unit when a GOT is connected to Q00JCPU.Mount the bus extension connector box to the extension base unit.) *3: Select a cable to keep the total cable length between the main base unit of a programmable controller and a terminal GOT within 37m. *4: Indication of cable model (example) "GT15-QC B 06:0.6m" GT15-QC06B *5: There are the following restrictions depending on the total cable length when three or more GOTs is connected. Use the same power supplies of a programmable controller and all GOTs and turn on or off all the power supplies simultaneously. : Unrestricted : Restricted

2 or less 3 4 5
15m or less
Total cable length 20m or less 25m or less
37m or less
*6: Use GT15-QBUS(2) for the following functions.GT15-75QBUS(2)L is not available. Video/RGB display, RGB output, printer output, Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function *7: The bus connection unit is not required for GT115 (dedicated to the bus connection).
74
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.3 Details of bus connection
Bus extension onnector box

*2
Cable
1
*4
GOT
1
*6
Cable
2
*4
Intermediary GOT
2 4
*6
Cable
3
*4
Terminal GOT
2 5
*6
GOT main unit Bus connection unit

GT15-QC B
GOT main unit
Bus connection unit
GOT main unit
Bus connection unit
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m
10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155

*7 5.7" GT115 (dedicated to bus connection)
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m

GT15-QC BS
12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *7
(dedicated to bus connection)
GT15-QC
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m
GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QC B
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100: 10m

GT15-QC BS
GT15-QC B
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100: 10m

GT15-QC BS
GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2
A9GT-QCNB
GT15-QC
15"GT1595 12.1"GT1585 10.4"GT157 8.4"GT156 5.7"GT155
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m

GT15-QC BS
GT15-QC B
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100: 10m

GT15-QC BS
GT15-QC B
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *7
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100: 10m

GT15-QC BS
150 : 15m 200 : 20m 250 : 25m 300 : 30m 350 : 35m
150 : 15m 200 : 20m
150 : 15m 200 : 20m
75
GLOSSARY
150 : 15m 200 : 20m 250 : 25m 300 : 30m 350 : 35m
150 : 15m 200 : 20m 250 : 25m 300 : 30m 350 : 35m
150 : 15m 200 : 20m 250 : 25m 300 : 30m 350 : 35m
FUNCTION
A9GT-QCNB
GT15-QC B
15" GT1595
SOFTWARE
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585
GOT
When connecting to QnACPU type or AnCPU type
of GOTs er
of GOTs er
nnected co
x. num b Ma
When connecting to QnA, AnU, or AnA
x. numb Ma
nected con
When connecting to CPUs other than that shown at left

Mounting distance between main base unit and first GOT*1
System configuration Connection distance 6.6m
0m
36.6m
Main base unit

A62P A4UCPU AX10 AX10 AX10 AX10 AY11 AY11 AJ71BR11 AJ71BR11
Extension base unit

A62P AX10 AX10 AX10 AX10 AY11 AY11 AJ71BR11 AJ71BR11
GOT
6.6m or less
Cable
*1
Max. 6.6m
1
Main base unit
Extension base unit

GOT
Bus connector conversion box
*2
6.6m or more
Cable Max. 6.6m

*1
0
*3
Cable
Max. 30m Max. 36.6m
Main base unit

Extension base unit

GOT
GOT
6.6m or less
Cable Max. 6.6m

*1
1
*3
Cable
Max. 30m Max. 36.6m
2
Main base unit
Extension base unit

GOT
GOT
*2
6.6m or more
Cable Max. 6.6m

*1
Cable
1
Max. 30m
*3
Cable
Max. 36.6m
Main base unit

Extension base unit

GOT
GOT
GOT
6.6m or less
Cable Max. 6.6m

*1
Cable
2
Max. 30m
*6
Cable
Max. 36.6m
*1: When the extension base unit is used, the extension cable length (between the base units) is included. For the cable between the main base unit and extension base unit, refer to Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEC-Q (Catalog) (L(NA)-08033E).
*2: When the first GOT is mounted 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3: Select a cable to keep the total cable length between the main base unit of a programmable controller and a terminal GOT within 36.6m.
76
*5
*5 *7
*5 *7
*5 *7

GT15-C NB
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *8
GT15-AC B
8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155

GT115 *8 5.7" (dedicated to bus connection)
GT15-C NB
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
15" GT1595 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C BS 07 : 0.7m 12.1" GT1585 GT15-ABUS2 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m 300 : 30m
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *8
GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2
GT15-AC B
A7GT-CNB GT15-C
EXSS-1
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
*4
100 : 10m 200 : 20m
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *8
GT15-C NB
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
15" GT1595 GT15-75ABUS2L 12.1" GT1585 GT15-ABUS2 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
GT15-C
BS
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *8
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
*4: For GT15-C EXSS-1 Consisting of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15-C BS (10 to 30m). When calculating the cable length, use GT15-C100EXSS-1 (10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1 (20m), and GT15-C300EXSS-1 (30m). Connect connectors as shown below. Connector "COM1" Programmable controller Connector "COM2" GOT
*5: Indication of cable model (example) "GT15-AC B 06:0.6m" GT15-AC06B *6: Select a cable to keep the total cable length within 30m. *7: Use GT15-ABUS(2) for the following functions.GT15-75ABUS(2)L is not available. Video/RGB display, RGB output, printer output, Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function *8: The bus connection unit is not required for GT115 (dedicated to the bus connection).
77
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
06 : 0.6m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
A7GT-CNB GT15-C EXSS-1

100 : 10m 200 : 20m 300 : 30m
*4
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157
SOFTWARE
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
GOT
Cable
Cable
GOT
Cable
GOT
Cable
GOT
When connecting to QnASCPU type or AnSCPU type without the extension base unit
x. num b Ma
x. numb Ma
of GOTs er
nected con
of GOTs er
nnected co
When connecting to QnAS or A2US(H)
When connecting to A1SJ(H) or AnS(H)CPU

Number of Mounting distance between main base GOTs connected unit and first GOT 0m
System configuration Connection distance 5m

GOT
Main base unit
A1S62P
POWER RUN ERROR
30m
35m
A2USCPU
STOP L.CLR RESET RUN RESET
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SH42
A1SH42
5m or less
Cable
Max. 5m
GOT
Main base unit
A1S62P
POWER RUN ERROR
A2USCPU
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SH42
A1SH42
5m or more 30m or less
Cable
Max. 30m GOT

Main base unit
A1S62P
POWER RUN ERROR
A2USCPU
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SH42
A1SH42
*1
Cable
0
Max. 35m GOT
*2
Cable
Max. 5m
Max. 30m
GOT
Main base unit

A1S62P
POWER RUN ERROR
A2USCPU
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SH42
A1SH42
5m or less
Cable
1
Max. 35m GOT
*2
Cable
Max. 5m
Max. 30m
GOT
Main base unit

A1S62P
POWER RUN ERROR
A2USCPU
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SH42
A1SH42
5m or more
Cable
1
Max. 30m
*3
Cable
Main base unit

A1S62P
POWER RUN ERROR
GOT
GOT
A2USCPU
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SH42
A1SH42
*1
Cable
Cable
1
Max. 30m
*3
Cable
Max. 5m Max. 35m GOT

Main base unit
A1S62P
POWER RUN ERROR
GOT
GOT
A2USCPU
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SP60
A1SH42
A1SH42
5m or less
Cable
Cable
2
Max. 30m
*3
Cable
Max. 5m Max. 35m
*1: When the first GOT is mounted 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *2: Select a cable to keep the total cable length between the main base unit of a programmable controller and a terminal GOT within 35m. *3: Select a cable to keep the total cable length within 30m.
78
1
Cable
0
*5

*1
Cable
1
*5
GOT
1
*6
Cable
2
*5
GOT
2
*6 Bus connection unit
Cable
3
*5
GOT
3
GOT
*6

GT15-A1SC B
GOT main unit
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
to bus connection) *7 5.7" GT115 (dedicated
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
2
SOFTWARE
GT15-C EXSS-1 *4
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
100 : 10m 200 : 20m 300 : 30m
3
FUNCTION
GT15-A1SC NB
A7GT-CNB
05 : 0.45m 07 : 0.7m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
GT15-C EXSS-1 *4
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
100 : 10m 200 : 20m 300 : 30m
4
GT15-C BS
GT15-A1SC B
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m 300 : 30m
GT15-C EXSS-1
100 : 10m 200 : 20m
12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *7
8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
GT15-A1SC NB
A7GT-CNB
05 : 0.45m 07 : 0.7m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
GT15-C EXSS-1
*4
100 : 10m 200 : 20m
GT15-C BS
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *7
GT15-A1SC B
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C BS
15"GT1595 12.1"GT1585 10.4"GT157 8.4"GT156 5.7"GT155

*7 5.7"GT115 (dedicated to bus connection)
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
*4: For GT15-C EXSS-1 Consisting of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15-C BS (10 to 30m). When calculating the cable length, use GT15-C100EXSS-1 (10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1 (20m), and GT15-C300EXSS-1 (30m). *5: Indication of cable model (example) "GT15-A1SC NB 05:0.45m" GT15-A1SC05NB *6: Use GT15-ABUS(2) for the following functions.GT15-75ABUS(2)L is not available. Video/RGB display, RGB output, printer output, Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function
*7: The bus connection unit is not required for GT115 (dedicated to the bus connection).
79
GLOSSARY
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
*4
15" GT1595 GT15-75ABUS2L 12.1" GT1585 GT15-ABUS2 10.4" GT157
GT15-C BS
15" GT1595
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
When connecting to QnASCPU type or AnSCPU type with the extension base unit
. Max numb
Max. num
r of GOTs be
of GOTs er
nnected co
nnected co
When connecting to QnAS or A2US(H)
When connecting to A1SJ(H) or AnS(H)CPU

Number of Mounting distance between main base GOTs 0m connected unit and first GOT
GOT
36m
Extension base unit

A1S62P
POWER
Main base unit

POWER
A1SP60
6m or less
Cable
Max. 6m
*1
Extension base unit

A1S62P
POWER
Main base unit

POWER
GOT
A1SP60
1
6m or more
Extension base unit
A1S62P
POWER
Cable
Max. 36m
*1*3
Max. 30m
GOT
Main base unit
POWER
A1SP60
*2
Cable
0
Max. 36m
*1*3
Cable
Max. 6m
*1
Max. 30m
Extension base unit

A1S62P
POWER
Main base unit

POWER
GOT
GOT
A1SP60
6m or less
Max. 6m
*1
Cable
1
Max. 36m
*1*3
Cable
Max. 30m
GOT
Extension base unit
A1S62P
POWER
Main base unit

POWER
GOT
A1SP60
2
6m or more
Extension base unit
A1S62P
POWER
Cable
1
*1*3
Cable
Max. 30m
Max. 36m
Main base unit

POWER
GOT
GOT
A1SP60
*2
Cable
Cable
1
*1
Cable
Max. 6m
*1
Max. 30m
*6
Max. 36m
GOT
Main base unit
POWER
Extension base unit

A1S62P
POWER
GOT
GOT
A1SP60
6m or less
Max. 6m
*1
Cable
Cable
2
Max. 30m
Cable
*6
Max. 36m
*1: The extension cable length (between the main base units) is included. For the cable between the main base unit and extension base unit, refer to Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEC-Q (Catalog) (L(NA)-08033E) *2: When the first GOT is mounted 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
80
1
Cable
0
*5

*1
Cable
1
*5
GOT
Cable
2
*5
GOT
2
Cable
3
*5
GOT
3
GOT
GOT main unit

GT15-A1SC B
*7 Bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2
GOT main unit
GOT main unit
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *8
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
2
SOFTWARE
(for bus connection)
GT15-C EXSS-1
*4
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *8
100 : 10m 200 : 20m 300 : 30m
3
FUNCTION
GT15-A1SC NB
A7GT-CNB
05 : 0.45m 07 : 0.7m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
GT15-C EXSS-1
*4
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
*8 5.7" GT115 (for bus connection)
100 : 10m 200 : 20m 300 : 30m
4
15"GT1595 12.1"GT1585 10.4"GT157 8.4"GT156 5.7"GT155
*8 5.7"GT115 (for bus connection)
GT15-A1SC B
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m 300 : 30m
GT15-C EXSS-1
100 : 10m 200 : 20m
12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
12.1"GT1585 10.4"GT157 8.4"GT156 5.7"GT155 5.7"GT115 *8

GT15-A1SC NB
A7GT-CNB
GT15-C EXSS-1 *4
5.7" GT155
5.7"GT155 5.7"GT115 *8
GT15-A1SC B
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
15" GT1595 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C BS 07 : 0.7m GT15-ABUS2

12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C BS
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115 *8
07 : 0.7m 12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
*3: Select a cable to keep the total cable length between the main base unit of a programmable controller and a terminal GOT within 36m. *4: For GT15-C EXSS-1 Consisting of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15-C BS (10 to 30m). When calculating the cable length, use GT15-C100EXSS-1 (10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1 (20m), and GT15-C300EXSS-1 (30m). *5: Indication of cable model (example) "GT15-A1SC NB 05:0.45m" GT15-A1SC05NB
*6: Select a cable to keep the total cable length within 30m. *7: Use GT15-ABUS(2) for the following functions.GT15-75ABUS(2)L is not available. Video/RGB display, RGB output, printer output, Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function *8: The bus connection unit is not required for GT115 (dedicated to the bus connection).
81
GLOSSARY
05 : 0.45m 07 : 0.7m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m
100 : 10m 200 : 20m
12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156
15" GT1595 GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C BS 07 : 0.7m GT15-ABUS2

12 : 1.2m 30 : 3m 50 : 5m 100 : 10m 200 : 20m
15"GT1595 12.1"GT1585 10.4"GT157 8.4"GT156
*4
15" GT1595
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-C BS 07 : 0.7m GT15-ABUS2
15"GT1595
When connecting to A0J2HCPU
Max. num
r of GOTs be
nnected co

Mounting distance between power supply module and first GOT

Programmable Power supply *1 module controller
1m
GOT
1m or less
Cable
Cable
0
Max. 1m Max. 6m
*1: The power supply module is required when a GOT is connected. *2: Indication of cable model (Example) "GT15-J2C B 10: 1m" GT15-J2C10B
*3: Use GT15-ABUS(2) for the following functions.GT15-75ABUS(2)L is not available. Video/RGB display, RGB output, printer output, Ethernet download, gateway function, MES interface function *4: The bus connection unit is not required for GT115 (dedicated to the bus connection).
Precautions on bus connection

Setting stage No. and slot No. of GOT 1. GOT recognized by programmable controller
When a GOT is connected with bus connection, a programmable controller recognizes the GOT as shown below. QCPU (Q mode) Intelligent function module with 16 I/O points Other than QCPU (Q mode) Intelligent function module with 32 I/O points In GOT1000 series, a GOT is automatically rebooted for the following cases. It is not required to restart (turn off and on) the GOT. When OS is installed with GT Designer2 or the CF card When the utility settings are changed (2) When a GOT is turned off before a user-created screen is displayed on the GOT Communication may not be made when a GOT is turned off before a usercreated screen is displayed on the GOT. In the above case, turn on a programmable controller and the GOT again. (3) Power-on order for case that three or more GOTs are connected to QCPU (Q mode) Reference 9. (1) Restrictions for total cable length to number of GOTs connected
2. I/O assignment
(1) Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Add one stage for connecting a GOT (16 points 10 slots) and assign the GOT to the I/O slots.(The GOT cannot be assigned to empty I/O slots on the main base unit and extension base unit.) Remarks I/O slots to which a GOT is not assigned can be set as empty slots (0 point). The I/O numbers of 16 points the number of the empty slots can be used for other devices.(Make settings in [PLC parameter] and then [I/O assignment] of GX Developer.) Reference 9. Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) in "Precautions" (2) Connecting to other than QCPU (Q mode) Assign a GOT to the empty I/O slot on the extension base unit. (When there is no extension base unit or there is no empty slot on the extension base unit, add a new extension stage and assign a GOT to the I/O slot of the new stage.)(The GOT cannot be assigned to empty I/O slots on the main base unit.) Reference 10. Connecting to QnA(S)CPU type or An(S)CPU type in "Precautions"
3. Reset switch of GOT

The reset switch of the GOT does not operate with the bus connection.
4. When a programmable controller is turned off or reset

(1) When a programmable controller is turned off or reset during monitoring When a programmable controller is turned off or reset during monitoring, a system alarm (No.402: timeout error) occurs.When the programmable controller is restored, a GOT automatically restarts monitoring. Reset the alarm with the system information. (2) When a programmable controller is turned off or reset before a usercreated screen is displayed on the GOT Communication may not be made when a programmable controller is turned off or reset before a user-created screen is displayed on the GOT. In the above case, turn on a programmable controller and the GOT again. (3) Power-on order for case that three or more GOTs are connected to QCPU (Q mode) Reference 9. (1) Restrictions for total cable length to number of GOTs connected
Precautions 1. Turning on GOT

(1) Designing system The programmable controller CPU remains reset until a GOT is started. A system where a GOT is started up by the sequence program cannot be designed. (2) Time taken for programmable controller to be started after power-on of GOT After a GOT is turned on, it takes approximately 10 seconds for the programmable controller to be started. When adding a GOT to the existing system or replacing an existing GOT with another GOT, take the programmable controller's start-up time into account and adjust the timings in the system. (3) Power-on order for case that three or more GOTs are connected to QCPU (Q mode) Reference 9. (1) Restrictions for total cable length to number of GOTs connected (4) Power-on order for case that GOT is connected to redundant Q4ARCPU system Reference 13. (2) Power-on order for case that GOT is connected to redundant Q4ARCPU system (5) Power-on order for case other than (3) and (4) The GOT can be started up first and the programmable controller can also be started up first. (There is no specific order in which the both devices are turned on.)) Note, however, that operation is as follows when the GOT is turned on before the programmable controller: When a GOT is turned on while the programmable controlled is off, a system alarm (No.402: timeout error) occurs.When the programmable controller is turned on, the GOT automatically restarts monitoring. Reset the alarm with the system information.
5. Connecting location of GOT

A GOT must be connected to the base unit at the last stage of the system. The GOT cannot be connected between the base units.
6. When a GOT is connected to a programmable controller CPU with bus connection without the communication driver installed
When a GOT is connected to a programmable controller CPU with the bus connection without the standard monitor OS and the communication driver for bus connection installed, the programmable controller CPU is reset.(The GOT cannot communicate to the programmable controller with GX Developer or other software.) In the above case, reset of the programmable controller is canceled when the bus connection cable of the GOT is removed.
7. Designing system
The current listed below is supplied from a programmable controller (the power supply module of the main base unit) to a GOT when the GOT is turned off. (The GOT is not activated when the GOT is turned off.) The rated output current of a power supply module to be used at 5VDC includes the currents consumed by a module mounted on the main base unit at 5VDC and consumed by a GOT. Design a system keep the total of the currents below the rated output current.
Target CPU
Number of GOTs connected Total current consumption
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
2. When a GOT is turned off or restarted (turned off and then on)
(1) Precautions for restarting (turning off and then on) a GOT Do not restart (turn off and then on) a GOT while the programmable controller is turned on. Be sure to turn off the programmable controller before restarting (turning off and then on) a GOT. Remarks Operation that automatically reboots GOT1000 series
Connecting to CPU other than QCPU (Q mode)
5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
2200mA 1760mA 1320mA 880mA 440mA 360mA 240mA 120mA
8. When the I/O signals of a GOT are assigned

The I/O signals assigned to a programmable controller are used on a GOT system. Do not use the I/O signals in a sequence program. Otherwise, functions of the GOT cannot be guaranteed.
82
1
Cable
0
*2
Power supply module *1
Cable
1
*2
GOT
1
*3
GOT main unit

A0J2C B
03: 0.3m (for horizontal mounting) 06: 0.55m (for vertical mounting) 10: 1m (for extension) 20: 2m (for extension)
Bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2
A0J2-PW
GT15-J2C10B
10 : 1m
15" GT1595 12.1" GT1585 10.4" GT157 8.4" GT156 5.7" GT155 5.7" GT115
*4(dedicated to bus connection)
9. Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)

(1) Restrictions for total cable length to number of GOTs connected There are the following restrictions when three or more GOTs are connected.
Number of GOTs connected 1 2 3 4 5 15m or less Total cable length 15 to 20m or less 20 to 25m or less 25 to 37m or less
Target CPU
QCPU (Q mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q series) QCPU (A mode)
Number of Total number of connectable connectable GOTs GOTs and intelligent function modules *1 5 GOTs and 6 intelligent 5
function modules *2
(2) When using Q00JCPU The bus extension connector box can be connected only to the extension base unit. (The bus extension connector box cannot be mounted on the main base unit.) (3) When using Q00J, Q00 or Q01CPU When the GOT is connected to the Q00JCPU with the bus connection, the number of extension stages including the GOT must be two or less. When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00CPU or Q01CPU, the number of extension stages including the GOT must be four or less. (4) When using QA1S6 B extension base unit Though the GOT is physically connected behind all the extension base units, assign the GOT to the stage right behind the Q B extension base unit in the extension stage number setting. Assign the QA1S6 B extension base unit as a stage next to the GOT.
Q38B main base unit Q68B extension base unit QA1S68B extension base unit GOT
6 in total 2 in total
*1: The following shows the models of connectable intelligent function modules. AD51(S3), AD51H(S), AD51FD(S3), AD57G(S3), AJ71C21(S1), AJ71C22(S1), AJ71C23, AJ71C24(S3/S6/S8), AJ71UC24, AJ71E71(-S3), AJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, AJ71E71N3-T, AJ61BT11 (only for the intelligent mode), A1SJ71C24(-R2/PRF/R4), A1SJ71UC24(-R2/PRF/R4), A1SJ71E71-B2/B5(-S3), A1SJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SD51S, A1SJ61BT11 (only for the intelligent mode) *2: A1SD51S is the only intelligent function module that can be connected to a QCPU (Q mode).
12. When using programmable controller CPU in direct mode

When the I/O control mode of the programmable controller CPU is the direct mode, and if the first GOT is connected to the main or extension base unit with a 5m extension cable (GT15-AC50B, GT15-A1SC50NB), the input X of the empty I/O slot cannot be used. No restrictions apply when the I/O control mode is the refresh mode. On programmable controller CPUs whose I/O control mode can be selected by a switch, set the I/O control mode to the refresh mode before use. Remarks Examples of using input X of an empty I/O slot When input X is assigned on the MELSECNET/10 network When input X of an empty I/O slot is turned on or off by the computer link module When input X of an empty I/O slot is turned on or off by the touch switch function (Bit SET/RST/Alternate/Momentary) of a GOT
Connection Stage No. 1 3 2
10. Connecting to QnA(S)CPU type or An(S)CPU type
Q3ACPU/Q4ACPU A0J2HCPU
7 1
Disabled
11. Connecting multiple GOTs

(1) System including different GOT series The GOT1000 series cannot be used with different GOT series in a system.
83
GLOSSARY
(1) Connecting to QnA(S)CPU type or An(S)CPU type A GOT can be connected to an extension connector on only one side of the main 13. Connecting to redundant Q4ARCPU system base unit.(GOTs cannot be connected simultaneously to the extension connectors (1) Connecting to redundant Q4ARCPU system with bus connection on bothsides.) Connect a GOT to the last redundant extension base unit (A68RB) of the (2) When using Q4A(R)CPU, Q3ACPU, A CPU or A4UCPU redundant Q4ARCPU system. At least one empty slot for an I/O module is required in a programmable controller For the redundant extension base units, use version B or later. system. The version can be confirmed in the DATE field of the rating plate. (3) When using A0J2HCPU Remarks Precautions for redundant Q4ARCPU system configurations Assign the GOT to the I/O slots 0 to 3 of the first extension stage. The GOT does not operate normally in the following system (4) When using CPUs other than CPUs of (2) and (3) configurations. Even if the maximum number of stages are used with no empty I/O slots, when there When the GOT is connected to the bus switching module (A6RAF) on is a free space of 32 I/O points or more, a GOT can be connected under the the redundant main base unit (A32RB/A33RB) with the bus connection following communication interface setting. When the GOT is connected to the version A redundant extension base unit (A68RB) with the bus connection (2) Power-on order for GOT and redundant Q4ARCPU system Communication interface setting Turn on the GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system in the following order. Target CPU Max. stage No. Slot No. Stage No. 1) Turn on the GOT. 2 0 A1 CPU/A2USCPU(-S1) 1 2) After the monitor screen is displayed on the GOT, turn on the redundant 4 0 A2 CPU/Q2ACPU 3 Q4ARCPU system.A timeout error is displayed on the system alarm. Reset A3 CPU/A4 CPU 7 the alarm with the system information.
: There are no restrictions. : Use the same power supplies of a programmable controller and all GOTs and turn on or off all the power supplies simultaneously.
Not connectable 3 QnACPU 3 AnUCPU, AnACPU, A2US(H)CPU 2 AnNCPU, AnS(H)CPU, A1SJ(H)CPU ACPU 1 A0J2HCPU Not connectable A1FXCPU A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), 3 Motion controller A373UCPU(-S3), A173UHCPU(-S1) CPU(A series) A171SHCPUN, A172SHCPUN 2
6 in total 6 in total 2 in total 2 in total
FUNCTION
(2) Restrictions on number of GOTs connected There are restrictions on the number of GOTs connected depending on the target CPU and the number of intelligent function modules mounted.
SOFTWARE
GOT
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.4 Direct CPU connection

QCPU/motion controller CPU (Q series)
Max. number of GOTs connected Max. connection distance
1
GOT System configuration
30.5m
1) RS-232
RS-232 cable GT01-C R2-6P
30: 3m
Built in GOT
D-sub 9-pin
RS-232 communication unit
or
GT15
GT15-RS2-9P Built in GOT
1
Max. connection distance
RS-232 cable Built in GOT GT10-C R2-6P

30: 3m
GT11
3m
GT10
Relay cable QCPU Motion controller CPU (Q series) *1 MELSECNET/H remote I/O station GT11H-C15R2-6P
External connection cable Built in GOT GT11H-C -37P

30: 3m
1
Handy GOT
6m
RS-232 cable GT01-C R2-6P

30: 3m
D-sub 9-pin
Max. number of *7 personal computers Built in personal A commercially connected *2 computer or available or RS-232 board GT SoftGOT1000 PC CPU 2 (DOS/V personal or 1 module is mounted. computer)
(PC CPU module*8) Max. connection + distance License key for GT SoftGOT1000
3m
*2: For using RS-232 and USB connections at the same time *7: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *8: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other main base units.
2) RS-422
RS-422 conversion cable
*5
RS-422 conversion unit
or
RS-422 cable
RS-422/485 communication unit
1
GT15
GT15-RS2T4-9P GT15-RS4-9S Built in GOT
FA-CNV CBL
2402: 0.2m 2405: 0.5m
GT01-C R4-25P
30: 3m 200: 20m 100: 10m 300: 30m
30.5m
GT11
RS-422 cable Built in GOT
1
GT10
FA-CNV CBL
2402: 0.2m 2405: 0.5m
GT10-C R4-25P
30: 3 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
30.5m
External connection cable Built in GOT
Relay cable
1
FA-CNV CBL *4 GT11H-C15R4-25P

2402: 0.2m 2405: 0.5m
GT11H-C -37P
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT
12m
*1: Available only for GT15 and GT11. *4: FA-CNV CBL is recommended. Purchase the cable from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEEERING CO., LTD. *5: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155 .
84
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.4 Direct CPU connection
QCPU MELSECNET/H remote I/O station

Cable
3) USB
*6
USB cable
Max. number of personal computers connected

*3
USB2-30 AU2-30
Built in personal computer or PC CPU module
1
GT SoftGOT1000 (DOS/V personal computer) (PC CPU module) + License key for GT SoftGOT1000
or
*3: For using RS-232 and USB connections at the same time *6:The USB communication cables are recommended. Purchase the cable from ELECOM CO.,LTD or ARVEL CORP.
Series GT11
Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection RS-232 connection GT115 GT115 -Q -Q BD BDQ, GT115 -Q
GOT model to be used
BDA
GT10
RS-422 connection

For connecting the GOT to multiple CPUs (Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU), use CPUs with the function version B or later. When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172CPU or Q173CPU (1) Use the motion controller CPU with the following production numbers. Q172CPU with K******* or later, Q173CPU with J******* or later (2) For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later For Q172CPUN or Q173CPUN For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later When connecting to Q172HCPU or Q173CPU of motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172HCPU and Q173CPU, the interface on the unit is USB only. Access the Q172HCPU or Q173CPU via the RS-232 interface of the QCPU on the multiple CPU system.
85
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
3m
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of direct CPU connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT For connection method with GT SoftGOT1000 For controllers that can be monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 9 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 2 in GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual (SH-080602ENG) Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 3 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
86
QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series)
1
GOT
30m
or Max. number of GOTs connected
RS-422 cable
GT15
1
GT01-C
30: 3m 100: 10m
R4-25P
200: 20m 300: 30m
GT11
RS-422 cable
Built in GOT GT10-C R4-25P

30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
1
GT10
30m
External connection cable
Relay cable
QnA ACPU Motion controller CPU (Q series)

RS-422 converter
Built in GOT GT11H-C15R4-25P

GT11H-C -37P 30: 3m 100: 10m 60: 6m
1
Handy GOT
11.5m
RS-422 cable
Commercially available product F2-232CAB D-sub 9-pin) AC30N2A (D-sub 25-pin

Built in personal
FX-422CAB FX-422CAB-150
*3
FX-232AW FX-232AWC
D-sub 9-pin computer or

PC CPU module
F2-232CAB-1
*3
DAFXIH-CAB
D232V-CAB (D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin) DCNV9F-RS42R *1 (D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin) DCNV25M-RS42R (D-sub 25-pin D-sub 25-pin) DAFXIH-CABV
DCR4-003
*2
*1: When using DCNV9F-RS42R, be sure to ground the FG terminal of a programmable controller system. *2: Keep the cable length of DCR4-003 (D-sub 25-pin D-sub 25-pin) below 3m. *3: Recommended Product.Purchase the cable from Diatrend Corporation. *4: Use the serial communication unit, GT15-R4-9S for GT155 . *5: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *6: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other main base units.

87
GLOSSARY
Conversion cable
GT SoftGOT1000 (DOS/V personal connected or computer) 1 *5 (PC CPU module*6) + Max. connection A commercially License key for distance available GT SoftGOT1000 RS-232 board is 15m mounted.
Max. number of personal computers
RS-232 cable
Conversion cable
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
30m
GOT
1) RS-422
*4 RS-422/485 communication unit
Precautions Precautions on system

When connecting the motion controller (A series) to GT SoftGOT1000, simultaneous connection with other MELSOFT products (such as GX Developer) is not allowed. The motion controller (A series) cannot be connected to the remote I/O station,
Other precautions
When monitoring MELSEC-A series (AnCPU type)*1, MELSEC-A series (AnSCPU type)*2, or MELSEC-A series*3, data can be written to only CPUs with the following software version or later. The earlier software version is not available. AnNCPU (S1): Version L or later for the one with link, version H or later for the one without link A2SCPU: Version H or later A0J2HCPU (With/without link): Version E or later A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later A2CCPU: Version H or later
*1: When connecting to A1NCPU, A1NCPUP21, A1NCPUR21, A2NCPU, A2NCPUP21, A2NCPUR21, CA2NCPUS1, A2NCPUP21-S1, A2NCPUR21-S1, A3NCPU, or A3NCPUP21 *2: When connecting to A2SCPU or A2SCPU-S1 *3: When connecting to A0J2HCPU, A0J2HCPUP21, A0J2HCPUR21, A0J2HCPU-DC24, or A2CCPU
When connecting or disconnecting converter/cable for GT SoftGOT1000 When connecting or disconnecting converter/cable that receives 5VDC power When connecting or disconnecting the converter/cable that receives 5VDC power from a programmable controller, power off the programmable controller and start working. When connecting or disconnecting converter/cable that does not receive 5VDC power When connecting or disconnecting peripheral devices and the cables that do not receive 5VDC power from a programmable controller (receives the power from an external power supply), follow the procedure as below. 1) Be sure to use an earth band or touch a grounded metal object before working to discharge the static electricity from the cables, human body, and others. 2) Power off the personal computer. 3) Power off the converter/cable. When the converter/cable have an FG terminal, ground it. 4) Connect/disconnect the converter/cable between the personal computer and programmable controller. 5) Power on the converter/cable. 6) Power on the personal computer. 7) Start up the software package. Use a RS-232 cable (F2-232CAB or F2-232CAB-1) applicable to the QnACPU or ACPU (For GT SoftGOT1000). For distinguishing cables applicable to the QnACPU and ACPU, check the indication of the model label on the cable. (Inapplicable cables are not available.)
Incompatible cables F2-232CAB Y990C***** F2-232CAB-1 Y990C***** Compatible cables (indicated as (F/FX/A)) F2-232CAB(F/FX/A) Y990C***** F2-232CAB-1(F/FX/A) Y990C*****
88
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of direct CPU connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT For connection method with GT SoftGOT1000 For controllers that can be monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 9 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 3 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG)
89
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
Chapter 2 in GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual (SH-080602ENG)
GOT
FX series (FX3U, FX3UC)
3
GOT
30m
1) RS-232
RS-232 cable
Built in GOT
or
FX series GT01-C R2-9S

S/S L N 0V 24V X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
+
GT15
*1
*2
IN
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 POWER RUN
30: 3m (Created by the user for 3m or more)
or
FX3U-16M
Y0 Y0 Y1 Y1 Y2
BATT ERROR OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Y7 Y7
Y2 Y3
Y3 Y4
Y4 Y5
Y5 Y6
Y6
FX3U,FX3UC
GT11
Function expansion board
RS-232 cable
15m
Built in GOT
S/S L N
0V 24V
X0 X1
X2 X3
X4 X5
X6 X7
IN
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 POWER RUN BATT ERROR
OUT
FX3U-16M
Y0 Y0 Y1 Y1 Y2 Y2 Y3 Y3 Y4 Y4 Y5 Y5 Y6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y7 Y7
.....
FX3U-422-BD FX3U-232-BD
Created by the user

Relay cable External connection cable
GT10
Y6
Function adapter
S/S L N 0V 24V X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
Created by the user

GT11H-C -37P
30: 3m
Built in GOT
1
Handy GOT
6m
IN
0 1 2 3
.....
GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m FX3U-232-ADP
OUT
FX3U-16M
Y0 Y0 Y1 Y1 Y2 Y2 Y3 Y3 Y4 Y4 Y5 Y5 Y6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y7 Y7
Y6
RS-232 cable
D-sub 9-pin
Max. number of personal computers connected

*6
GT01-C R2-9S
30: 3m
+ D-sub 25-pin
Built in personal or computer or PC CPU module
GT SoftGOT1000 A commercially Max. connection (DOS/V personal available RS-232 distance computer) board is mounted. (PC CPU module*8) + License key for GT SoftGOT1000
4.5m
GT01-C R2-25P
30: 3m
*1: When using the function expansion board (FX3U-232-BD) or the function adapter (FX3U-232ADP) *2: When using a equipment used in *1 and the CPU port (RS-422) *6: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *8: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other main base units.

90
*5
RS-422 cable
or

*3 *4
+
GT01-C R4-8P FX series
S/S L N 0V 24V X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
2
GT15
or
IN
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 POWER RUN BATT
Built in GOT
30m
GT11
*3
FX3U-16M
Y0 Y0 Y1 Y1 Y2 Y2 Y3 Y3 Y4 Y4 Y5
ERROR OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y5 Y6 Y6 Y7 Y7
FX3U,FX3UC
Function expansio board

S/S L N 0V 24V X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
RS-422 cable
GT10-C R4-8P
10: 1m 30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
Built in GOT
*4
GT10
3 Max. connection distance

or
IN
0 1 2 3
OUT
FX3U-16M
Y0 Y0 Y1 Y1 Y2 Y2 Y3 Y3 Y4 Y4 Y5 Y5 Y6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y7 Y7
Y6
FX3U-422-BD FX3U-232-BD
Relay cable
Functio adapter
S/S L N 0V 24V X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
Built in GOT GT11H-C15R4-8P GT11H-C -37P

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
1
Handy GOT
IN
0 1 2 3
...
RS-422 cable
FX3U-232-ADP
13m
Built in personal computer or PC CPU module or Max. number of personal computers connected
OUT
FX3U-16M
Y0 Y0 Y1 Y1 Y2 Y2 Y3 Y3 Y4 Y4 Y5 Y5 Y6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y7 Y7
Y6
RS-232 cable
Conversion cable
Commercially available product
AC30N2A
*3: When using the CPU port (RS-422) and function expansion board (FX3U-422-BD) *4: When using the equipments indicated in *3 and the RS-232 type function adapter at the same time *5: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155 . *7: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *9: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other main base units.

91
GLOSSARY
FX-422CABO FX-232AW FX-232AWC FX-232AWC-H
GT SoftGOT1000 (DOS/V personal computer) *7 (PC CPU module*9) D-sub 9-pin + A commercially License key for available RS-232 GT SoftGOT1000 F2-232CAB-1 (D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin)
1
4.5m
board is mounted.
FUNCTION
...
30m
SOFTWARE
10: 1m 30: 3m 100: 10m
200: 20m 300: 30m
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT15-RS4-9S
GOT
2) RS-422

The function expansion boards and function adapters that can be connected to the GOT are the FX3U232-BD, FX3U-422-BD, and FX3U-232ADP only.
Precautions on setup
When connecting or disconnecting converter/cable for GT SoftGOT1000 When connecting or disconnecting converter/cable that receives 5VDC power When connecting or disconnecting the converter/cable that receives 5VDC power from a programmable controller, power off the programmable controller and start working. When connecting or disconnecting converter/cable that does not receive 5VDC power When connecting or disconnecting peripheral devices and the cables that do not receive 5VDC power from a programmable controller (receives the power from an external power supply), follow the procedure as below. 1) Be sure to use an earth band or touch a grounded metal object before working to discharge the static electricity from the cables, human body, and others. 2) Power off the personal computer. 3) Power off the converter/cable. When the converter/cable have an FG terminal, ground it. 4) Connect/disconnect the converter/cable between the personal computer and programmable controller. 5) Power on the converter/cable. 6) Power on the personal computer. 7) Start up the software package.
Other precautions
When a keyword is registered for the FXCPU (FX3U/FX3UC series), the GOT may not monitor the CPU. Execute the I/O check again. When the I/O check result is normal, check the keyword registration of the CPU. When connecting the FX-232AWC-H to the FX3UCCPU, the transmission speed of 600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200bps can be used. When conncting the FX-232AWC or FX-232AW to the FX3UCCPU, the transmission speed of 9600 or 19200bps can be used.
Related Manuals
92
MEMO

93
FUNCTION SOFTWARE GOT
GLOSSARY
FX series (FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC)
2
FX series
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
30m
1) RS-232
POWER RUN BATT.V PROG.E CPU.E
FX2N-32MR
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
RS-232 cable
D-sub 9-pin
Built in GOT
RS-232 communication unit or
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N
+

IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
GT01-C R2-9S *1
30: 3m D-sub 25-pin
GT15

*3 *4 or
FX2N-32MR
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
.....
FX N-232-BD
GT01-C R2-25P
*2
GT11
Function adapter
RS-232 cable
D-sub 9-pin
15m
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
FX2N-32MR
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
.....
FX2NC-232ADP FX0N-232ADP
D-sub 25-pin
Built in GOT
GT10
Created by the user
Relay cable FX series

FX2NC-16MT
Built in GOT Created by the user

1
Handy GOT
GT11H-C -37P
30: 3m
FX1NC, FX2NC
Function adapter
FX2NC-232ADP
FX2NC-16MT
Built in GOT GT11H-C

30: 3m 60: 6m
6m
........
FX2NC-232ADP
RS-232 cable
D-sub 9-pin *7
Function adapter
FX0N-232ADP
FX2NC-16MT
GT01-C R2-9S *1
30: 3m D-sub 25-pin
POWER RD SD
or
.......
FX0N-232ADP
A commercially available RS-232 board is mounted.
1
GT SoftGOT1000 (DOS/V personal computer) (PC CPU module*9) + License key for GT SoftGOT1000
GT01-C R2-25P *2
4.5m
*1: FX1S, FX1N, FX2N When using the function expansion board (FX N-232-BD) or thefunction adapter (FX2NC-232ADP) FX1NC, FX2NC When using the function adapter (FX2NC-232ADP) *2: When using the function adapter (FX0N-232ADP) *3: When using the function expansion board indicated in *1 or *2 or the function adapter *4: When using a equipment used in *3 and the CPU port (RS-422) at the same time *7: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *9: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other main base units.

Series GT11 Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection RS-232 connection RS-422 connection GT115 -Q BD GOT model to be used
GT10
GT115 -Q BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA GT1030-LBD2/GT1030-LBDW2, GT1020-LBD2/GT1020-LBDW2 GT1030-LBD/GT1030-LBDW, GT1020-LBD/GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW (For GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW, MELSEC-FXCPU connection is available only.)
94
2) RS-422
FX series
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
*6
or

*5
FX2N-32MR
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
RS-422 cable
+ +
GT15
or
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N
10: 1m 30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
GT11
30m
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
FX2N-32MR
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
.....
FX N-232-BD
Function adapter
RS-422 cable

*5
GT10-C R4-8P
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
FX2N-32MR
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
.....
FX2NC-232ADP FX0N-232ADP
10: 1m 30: 3m
100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
30 m
FX series
FX2NC-16MT
Relay cable
1
Built in GOT
GT11H-C15R4-8P
FX1NC, FX2NC
GT11H-C -37P
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT
13m
Function adapter
FX2NC-232ADP
FX2NC-16MT
........
FX2NC-232ADP
RS-422 cable
RS-232 cable
Conversion cable
Function adapter
FX0N-232ADP
FX2NC-16MT
+
FX-422CABO
F2-232CAB Commercially AC30N2A available product
POWER RD SD
.......
FX0N-232ADP
FX-232AW FX-232AWC FX-232AWC-H
When used with the function expansion board (FX N-422-BD) FX1NC, FX2NC When used with the RS-232 type function adapter *6: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155 . *8: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *10: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other main base units. *5: FX1S, FX1N, FX2N

Series GT11 Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection RS-232 connection GT10 RS-422 connection GT115 -Q BD GOT model to be used
95
GLOSSARY
F2-232CAB-1
GT SoftGOT1000 (DOS/V personal 1 computer) (D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin) or (PC CPU module*10) Max. connection *8 + D-sub 9-pin distance A commercially License key for GT SoftGOT1000
available RS-232 board is mounted.
4.5m
FUNCTION
Built in GOT
1
GT10
or
SOFTWARE
GT01-C R4-8P
GOT
Precautions Precautions on setup

Related Manuals
96
MEMO

97
GLOSSARY
FX series (FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C)
1
30m
1) RS-422
*3
RS-422 cable
or
GT01-C R4-8P *1
10: 1m 30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
+ +
1
GT15
30m
GT11
GT01-C R4-25P *2 FX series

30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
RS-422 cable
FX0N-24MR
GT10-C R4-8P *1
FX0S,FX0N 10: 1m 30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
1
Built in GOT
GT10
30 m
GT10-C R4-25P *2
30: 3m 200: 20m 100: 10m 300: 30m
FX1, FX2, FX2C
Relay cable
GT11H-C15R4-8P *1 GT11H-C -37P

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Built in GOT
1
Handy GOT
13m
GT11H-C15R4-25P *2
RS-422 cable RS-422 conversion unit RS-232 cable
Conversion cable
Built in personal computer or PC CPU module or

*4
FX-422CAB *2 FX-422CAB-150 *2 FX-232AW FX-232AWC FX-232AWC-H FX-422CABO *1
F2-232CAB Commercially AC30N2A available product

(D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin)
D-sub 9-pin
F2-232CAB-1
A commercially available RS-232 board is mounted.
1
4.5m
*1: When connecting to FX0S or FX0N *2: When connecting to FX1, FX2, or FX2C *3: Use GT15-RS4-9S for usingGT155 . *4: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *5: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other main base units.

98

Related Manuals
99
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.5 Computer link connection

QCPU (Q mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q series)
1
1200m
1) RS-232
RS-232 cable
Built in GOT
+
+
GT09-C R2-9P *4
30: 3m
GT15
Max. number of GOTs connected *1
1
GT11
or
RS-23 cable
15m
Built in GOT
Created by the user

GT10
Built in GOT QCPU (Q mode) Motion controller CPU (Q series) MELSECNET/H *6 remote I/O station
RS-232 cable
*11
1
Handy GOT
Created by the user *2
GT11H-C -37P GT11H-C

30: 3m 30: 3m 60: 6m
6m
D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin (male) (female)
A commercially Built in personal GT SoftGOT1000 (DOS/V personal or available RS-232 computer or computer) PC CPU module board is mounted. (PC CPU module*12)
+ License key for GT SoftGOT1000
1
Created by the user

AJ71UC24-S2
15m
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
2) RS-422
Serial communication module
*5
or
RS-422 cable
+
GT15

*1
+
GT09-C R4-6C *4
30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT15-RS4-9S Built in GOT
1
GT11
or
1,200m
or
RS-422 cable
500m Built in GOT
*3
GT10
Created by the user


30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m 30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Built in GOT
1
Handy GOT
13m
*1: When using QJ71C24N(-R2/R4) *2: Required for using GT11H-C -37P. *3: When using A1SJ71UC24-R4 or A1SJ71C24-R4 *4: Recommended Product. Purchase the cable from Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.
*5: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155 . *6: GT SoftGOT1000 is not available. *12: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *13: Connect the PC CPU module to a serial communication module on any of the other base units.
100
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.5 Computer link connection
Available module
Serial communication module/Computer link module Model QJ71C24*8 QJ71C24-R2*8 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N-R2 QJ71C24N-R4*9 QJ71CMO*10*11 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 CH1 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-422/485 Modular connector RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-232
*7
Communications via the RS-485 interface cannot be executed. A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used. Either CH1 or CH2 can be used for the function version A. CH1 can be used with CH2 for the function version B or later. Not available for GT SoftGOT1000. Connectable only with CH2. Not available for GT10.
Connecting the GOT directly to Basic model QCPU is recommended. The GOT is not applicable to the serial communication function for Basic model QCPU. Connect a terminating resistor (330 , 1/4W (orange, orange, brown, )) to the serial communication module/computer link module. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor.
101
GLOSSARY
Use multiple CPUs (Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, and Q12HCPU) to be connected to the GOT with the CPU function version B or later. When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172CPU or Q173CPU Use the motion controller CPU with the following production numbers. Q172CPU with N******* or later, Q173CPU with M******* or later For Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later
Other precautions
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
CH2
GOT
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of computer link connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT For connection method with GT SoftGOT1000 For controllers that can be monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 9 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 2 in GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual (SH-080602ENG) Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 4 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
102
MEMO

103
GLOSSARY
QnACPU type
1
GOT
1200m
1) RS-232
RS-232 cable
Built in GOT
+
GT15
GT09-C R2-9P*3
30: 3m
GT09-C R2-25P
30: 3m
GT11
1
RS-23 cable
15m
Built in GOT
GT10
Created by the user

Relay cable External connection cable Max. number of GOTs connected
Created by the user *1 QnACPU type

D-sub 25-pin
AJ71UC24-S2
GT11H-C
30: 3m
-37P GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m
Built in GOT
1
Handy GOT
6m
*10
AC30N2A
Serial communication module
A commercially
or available RS-232
board is mounted.
1
15m
2) RS-422
*4
RS-422 cable
or
+
GT15
GT01-C R4-25P
30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
GT15-RS2T4-9P GT15-RS4-9S
1
GT09-C R4-6C*3
30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
Built in GOT
GT11
1,200m
or *2
RS-422 cable
500m

GT10 *5
Built in GOT Created by the user *1 GT11H-C -37P

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m *1: When using GT11H-C -37P *2: When using A1SJ71UC24 *3: Recommended Product. Purchase the cable from Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.
GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT
1
13m
*4: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155 . *10: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *11: Connect the PC CPU module to a serial communication module on any of the other base units.
104
Available module
Serial communication module/Computer link module Model AJ71QC24*6 AJ71QC24-R2*6 AJ71QC24-R4*6*7 AJ71QC24N*6 AJ71QC24N-R2*6 AJ71QC24N-R4*6*7 A1SJ71QC24*6 A1SJ71QC24-R2*6 A1SJ71QC24N*6 A1SJ71QC24N-R2*6 A1SJ71QC24N1*6 A1SJ71QC24N1-R2*6 AJ71UC24*6*8*9 *5 RS-232 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 CH1 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-422/485
*5

Connect a terminating resistor (330 , 1/4W (orange, orange, brown, module/computer link module. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor. )) to the serial communication
When the A series computer link module is used with the QnACPU, the QnACPU cannot be monitored with GT SoftGOT1000.
105
GLOSSARY
*6 *7 *8 *9
Communications via the RS-485 interface cannot be executed. A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used. When the A series computer link module is used with the QnACPU, the devices that can be monitored are only devices with the same name as the devices in the device range of the AnACPU. Note that the following devices cannot be monitored. Devices newly added to the QnACPU Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (For the QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay (M). However, the internal relay is accessed even if the latch relay or the step relay is specified.) File register (R) Either CH1 or CH2 can be used. Not available for GT SoftGOT1000. The module operates in the device range of the AnACPU. (The R device is not available.) Not available for GT10.
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
CH2
GOT
Related Manuals
106
MEMO

107
GLOSSARY
QCPU (A mode)/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series)
1
GOT
500m
1)RS-232
RS-232 cable
Built in GOT
GT09-C R2-9P*2
30: 3m
+
1
GT15
15 m
GT11
GT09-C R2-25P*2
30: 3m
Relay cable
Built in GOT QCPU (A mode) ACPU type Motion controller CPU (A series) AC30N2A
AJ71UC24-S2
1
Handy GOT

30: 3m 30: 3m 60: 6m
6m
*10 D-sub 25-pin
Built in personal A commercially or available RS-232 computer or PC CPU module board is mounted. GT SoftGOT1000
......
Computer link module
(DOS/V personal computer) (PC CPU module*11) + License key for GT SoftGOT1000
*3
1
15 m
2)RS-422
RS-422 cable RS-422 conversion unit or
1
GT15
+ +
200: 20m 300: 30m
GT09-C R4-6C*2
30: 3m 100: 10m
500 m
GT11
Relay cable
Built in GOT Created by the user *1 GT11H-C -37P GT11H-C

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m 30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
1
Handy GOT
13 m
*1: Required for using GT11H-C -37P. *2: Recommended Product. Purchase the cable from Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *3: Use GT15-RS4-9S for usingGT155 . *10: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *11: Connect the PC CPU module to a computer link module on any of the other base units.

108
Available module
Serial communication module/Computer link module*4 CPU series Model MELSEC-Q series (A mode) A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-R4*7 AJ71UC24*5*6 AJ71C24-S8*9 A1SJ71UC24-R2*6 A1SJ71UC24-R4*6*7 A1SJ71C24-R2*6*8 A1SJ71C24-R4*6*7*8 A1SCPUC24-R2*6 A2CCPUC24*5 CH1 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-232 RS-232 CH2 RS-422/485 RS-422 RS-422/485
MELSEC-A series Motion controller CPU (A series)
*4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9
Communications via the RS-485 interface cannot be executed. A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used. Either CH1 or CH2 can be used. When connecting to A1SHCPU, A2SCPU (S1), A2SHCPU (S1), A1SJHCPU, A0J2HCP, A171SHCPU (N), or A172SHCPU, use the computer link module with the software version U or later. Not available for GT SoftGOT1000. The module operates in the device range of the AnACPU. (The R device is not available.) Available only for GT SoftGOT1000.

Connect a terminating resistor (330 , 1/4W (orange, orange, brown, )) to the serial communication module/computer link module. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor. The motion controller (A series) cannot be connected to the remote I/O station.
When connecting GT11 to A series computer link module When connecting the GT11 to the A series computer link module via the RS-232 communication, set the buffer memory for the module without checking the CD signal.
Related Manuals
GLOSSARY
109
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.6 MELSECNET/H connection

63
1km
1) Optical loop
MELSECNET/H communication unit
63
+
GT15-J71LP23-25
*4 *3
GT15
1 km *1
Optical fiber cable
MELSECNET/H board for personal computer
+
QCPU QnA/ACPU (control station/normal station) Motion controller CPU (A series)
A J61QBT11
456 456
+
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 Q80BD-J71LP21G
Programmable + controller CPU
64
PC CPU MELSECNET/H + module network module

QJ71LP21-25
RUN T.PASS SD ERR. M NG D.LINK RD L ERR. STATION NO. X1 0
78
1 km
OUT
QJ71LP21 -2 5
Network module
90 1
01 EF 2
345
QJ71BR11
GT SoftGOT1000 Network module (PC CPU module) + GT SoftGOT1000 License key for GT SoftGOT1000
*1: Distance between stations for using the QSI optical cable.The overall extension cable length and the length between stations differ depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations.For details, refer to the MELSECNET/H reference manual. *2: Distance between stations for using the 5C-2V coaxial cable. The overall extension cable length and the length between stations differ depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the MELSECNET/H reference manual. *3: For the cable type to be used, refer to the MELSECNET/H reference manual. *4: For the MELSECNET/H board driver (SW0DNC-MNETH-B), use the version K or later.
110
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.6 MELSECNET/H connection
D BC
M ODE
78
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
90 1
23
X1
78
4 23 5
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
89 67
ABCD
23
23
......
456
78
901 901 901
78
78
GT SoftGOT1000 Network module (PC CPU module) + GT SoftGOT1000 License key for GT SoftGOT1000
2) Coaxial bus
+
GT15-J71BR13
*3
Coaxial cable
+
+
Q80BD-J71BR11

QJ71BR11
RUN T.PASS SD ERR. STATION NO. X10 M NG D.LINK RD L ERR.
23
456 456
89 67 A
D BC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
90 1
23
X1
IN
01 EF 2
345
MODE
78
90 1
23
45 6
456
89 67 A
01 EF
31
GT15
500 m
*2
32
500 m
64
1 km
Available module
MELSECNET/H module CPU series Optical loop MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)*5 *5 QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11
GOT
1
Coaxial bus
Use the CPU and MELSECNET/H network module with the function version B or later.

Connectable network A GOT is connected to the following network systems as a normal station. Optical loop system of MELSECNET/H network system (programmable controller to programmable controller network) Coaxial bus system of MELSECNET/H network system (programmable controller to programmable controller network) When using MELSECNET/H network module When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to MELSECNET/H network system, set the network type to the MELSECNET/H mode or the MELSECNET/H extended mode. Creating network For the network where a GOT is connected, create a MELSECNET/H network (programmable controller to programmable controller network). The GOT cannot be connected to the following network. MELSECNET/H system (remote I/O network) Applicable range for monitoring A GOT can monitor a programmable controller on the network where the GOT is conncted or on other networks. Note that the routing parameter setting is required when monitoring the programmable controller CPU on the other network. Network type setting When setting the network type, set all the network modules in the same network to the same network type. (The MELSECNET/H mode and MELSECNET/H extended mode cannot be set simultaneously.) For the MELSECNET/H connection with the redundant QCPU system, the network type cannot be set to [MNET/H EXT mode]. When connecting to QCPU (Q mode) For MELSECNET/H network module and QCPU (Q mode), use the function version B or later. The motion controller (A series) cannot be connected to the remote I/O station.
2
SOFTWARE
3
FUNCTION
4
5
When changing the switch setting When changing the switch setting after installing the MELSECNET/H communication unit on the GOT, reset the GOT. Correctly solder the connector for the coaxial cable. Incomplete soldering causes malfunctions.
6
Other precautions
For connecting the GOT to multiple CPUs (Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU), use CPUs with the function version B or later. In the redundant QCPU system, the MELSECNET/H extended mode is not available. When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172CPU or Q173CPU Use the motion controller CPU with the following production numbers. Q172CPU with N******* or later, Q173CPU with M******* or later For Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later
7
GLOSSARY
111
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of MELSECNET/H connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with GT SoftGOT1000 For controllers that can be monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 2 in GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual (SH-080602ENG) Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 5 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
112
MEMO

113
GLOSSARY
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.7 MELSECNET/10 connection

Max. number of GOTs connected Max. connecti distance
63
GOT
1km
1) Optical loop
or
MELSECNET/10 communication unit
63
+
GT15-J71LP23-25
*3
GT15-75J71LP23-Z
*4*5
GT15
1 km *1
Optical fiber cable

+
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 Q80BD-J71LP21G QCPU QnA/ACPU (control station/ normal station) Motion controller CPU (A series)
A J61QBT11
64

QJ71LP21-25
RUN T.PASS SD ERR. M NG D.LINK RD L ERR. STATION NO. X1 0
1 km
IN
01 EF 2
345
OUT
QJ71LP21 -2 5
GT SoftGOT1000 Network module (PC CPU module) + License key fot GT SoftGOT1000
*1: Distance between stations for using the QSI fiber-optic cable. The overall extension cable length and the length between stations differ depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 reference manuals.
456
456
Network module
90 1
01 EF 2
345
QJ71BR11
GT SoftGOT1000 Network module (PC CPU module) + License key fot GT SoftGOT1000
*2: Distance between stations for using the 5C-2V coaxial cable. The overall extension cable length and the length between stations differ depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations. For details, refer to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 reference manuals. *3: For the cable type to be used, refer to th MELSECNET/10 reference manual. *4: Select the MELSECNET/10 mode for [Communication Setting]. *5: For the MELSECNET/H board driver (SW0DNC-MNETH-B), use the version K or later.
114
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.7 MELSECNET/10 connection
D BC
M OD E
78
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
90 1
23
X1
78
4 23 5
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
89 67
ABCD
23
23
......
456
78
901 901 901
78
78
2) Coaxial bus
MELSECNET/H communication or unit
+
GT15
GT15-J71BR13
*3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z
Coaxial cable

+
Programmable controller CPU +
+
Q80BD-J71BR11
MELSECNET/H PC CPU + network module module

QJ71BR11
RUN T.PASS SD ERR. STATION NO. X1 0 M NG D.LINK RD L ERR.
23
456 456
89 67 A
D BC
MODE
78
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
X1
90 1
23
78
90 1
23
45 6
456
89 67 A
01 EF
31
*2
500 m
32
500 m
64
1 km
Available module
MELSECNET/H module (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 module CPU series Optical loop MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)*6 QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S AJ71LP21 A1SJ71LP21 QJ71BR11
GOT
Coaxial bus
MELSEC-QnA series MELSEC-Q series (A mode) MELSEC-A series Motion controller CPU (A series) *6
AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QBR11 AJ71BR11 A1SJ71BR11
2
SOFTWARE
Use the CPU and MELSECNET/H network module with the function version B or later.
3
FUNCTION
4
5
6
7
GLOSSARY
115

Connectable network A GOT is connected to the following network systems as a normal station. Optical loop system of MELSECNET/10 network system (programmable controller to programmable controller network) Coaxial bus system of MELSECNET/10 network system (programmable controller to programmable controller network) When using MELSECNET/H network module When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to MELSECNET/10 network system, set the network type to the MELSECNET/10 mode. Creating network For the network where a GOT is connected, create a MELSECNET/H network system (programmable controller to programmable controller network) with the MELSECNET/10 mode or a MELSECNET/10 network system (programmable controller to programmable controller network). The GOT cannot be connected to the following networks. MELSECNET/H network system (remote I/O network) MELSECNET/10 network system (remote I/O network) Applicable range for monitoring A GOT can monitor a programmable controller on the network where the GOT is conncted or on other networks. The routing parameter setting is required when monitoring the programmable controller on other networks. The routing parameter cannot be set with the GT15-75J71LP23-Z and GT15-75J71BR13-Z. Use the GT15-J71LP23-25 or GT15-J71BR13 to set the routing parameter. When connecting to QCPU (Q mode) For MELSECNET/H network module and QCPU (Q mode), use the function version B or later. With the redundant QCPU system, the MELSECNET/H extended mode is not available.
When changing the switch setting When changing the switch setting after installing the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 communication unit on the GOT, reset the GOT. Correctly solder the connector for the coaxial cable. Incomplete soldering causes malfunctions.
Other precautions
For connecting the GOT to multiple CPUs (Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU), use CPUs with the function version B or later. The motion controller (A series) cannot be connected to the remote I/O station. When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172CPU or Q173CPU Use the motion controller CPU with the following production numbers. Q172CPU with N******* or later, Q173CPU with M******* or later For Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later
116
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of MELSECNET/10 connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 6 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
GOT
2
SOFTWARE
3
FUNCTION
4
5
6
7
GLOSSARY
117
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.8 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

26
QCPU
*2
1200m
QnA/ACPU (Master/local stations) Motion controller CPU (A series)

A J61QBT11
CC-Link dedicated cable
CC-Link communication unit
26
+
GT15-J61BT13 *3 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
GT15
456
456
CC-Link module *1: When the CC-Link dedicated cable of 156kbps is used The maximum overall extension cable length and the cable length between stations differ depending on the cable type to be used or others. *2: For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following website. CC-Link Partner Association website: http://www.cc-link.org/eng/t_html/top.html *3: For connection on the CC-Link network system Ver.2. For connection on the CC-Link network system Ver.1, set the mode to Ver.1 in [Communication Setting].
Available module
CPU series MELSEC-Q series (Q mode) MELSEC-QnA series MELSEC-Q series (A mode) MELSEC-A series Motion controller CPU (A series) *4 QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N*4 AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 CC-Link module
Use the model applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2 or the CC-Link network system Ver.1 with Ver.2.
118
4 23 5
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
89 67
ABCD
23 78 23 78
......
456
78
901 901 901
1200 m
*1
01 EF
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.8 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

When using cyclic transmission (1) I/O signals from/to master station Do not turn on reserved output signals among output signals from the master station to a GOT (remote output: RY). When the reserved output signals are turned on, the programmable controller system may malfunction. (2) Applicable range for monitoring Applicable ranges for monitoring remote I/O (RX, RY) and remote register (RWr, RWw) differ depending on the master station mode of the CC-Link network system.
Availability of monitoring Mode of master station Information of CC-Link Ver.1 compatible station Remote network mode Remote network ver.1 mode Remote network ver.2 mode Remote network additional mode : Monitoring enabled,
*1 *1
Information of CC-Link Ver.2 compatible station
: Creating system disabled
When using transient transmission (1) CC-Link module on target station When using transient transmission to communicate with the following CC-Link modules, mount the CC-Link module with the function version B and the software version J or later on a programmable controller. When communicating with the CC-Link module with the function version A and the software version I or earlier, only the cyclic transmission is available. AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 (2) Accessible range for monitoring A GOT can access a programmable controller CPU with the CC-Link module set as the master or local station. The GOT cannot access other networks via the CC-Link module. Starting GOT with CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) When the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) is used, the data link starts in about 10 minutes after starting the GOT.
When changing the switch setting after installing the GT15-75J65BT13-Z type CC-Link communication unit on a GOT, reset the GOT. Setting [Network parameters] of GX Developer When [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set to [Remote net (Ver.2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. The [Remote station points] setting is a setting for the remote I/O station. For a GOT, use the default value (32 points). Set the station information setting to [Ver.1 Intelligent device station] when [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set to [Remote net (Ver.2 mode)] or [Remote net(Additional mode)].
119
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
*1 Available only for using GT15-J61BT13 type CC-Link communication unit.
SOFTWARE
GOT
Other precautions
When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172CPU or Q173CPU Use the motion controller CPU with the following production numbers. Q172CPU with N******* or later, Q173CPU with M******* or later For Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later For connecting the GOT to multiple CPUs (Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU), use CPUs with the function version B or later. When an error related to the network occurs as the system alarm When an error related to the network occurs as the system alarm with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), the displayed system alarm cannot be erased even though the error factor is removed. Restart a GOT to erase the system alarm.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of CC-Link connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 7 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
120
MEMO
121
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.9 CC-Link connection (via G4)

Max. number of GOTs connected Max. connectio distance
1
GOT
1230m
*2 *3
GPP function peripheral connection module
RS-422 cable
*3
QCPU (Q mode) Motion controller CPU(Q series)

30: 3m 100: 10m
or
1
AJ65BT-G4-S3 GT01-C R4-25P

200: 20m 300: 30m
+ GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT15
1230 m
GT11
*1
A J61QBT11
456
456
CC-Link module

Available module*4
CPU series MELSEC-Q series (Q mode) *4 CC-Link module QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N -Q BD. GPP function peripheral connection module AJ65BT-G4-S3
Only the master station can be monitored on GT115
122
4 23 5
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
89 67
ABCD
23 78 23 78
....
456
78
901 901 901
GPP function peripheral connection module
Relay cable
01 EF
AJ65BT-G4-S3
GT11H-C15R4-25P
GT11H-C -37P
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Built in GOT Handy GOT
1
13 m
*1: When the CC-Link dedicated cable of 156Kbps (1200m) and the RS-422 cable (30m) are used. *2: For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following website. CC-Link Partner Association website: http://www.cc-link.org/eng/t_html/top.html *3: Use the serial communication unit, GT15-RS4-9S for GT155 .
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.9 CC-Link connection (via G4)

Programmable controller CPU that can be monitored with the CC-Link connection (via G4) The QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored. The QnACPU, ACPU, and QCPU (A mode) cannot be monitored. AJ65BT-G4 cannot be connected to a GOT.
Setting [Network parameters] of GX Developer When [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set to [Remote net (Ver.2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. The [Remote station points] setting is a setting for the remote I/O station. For a GOT, use the default value (32 points). Set the station information setting to [Ver.1 Intelligent device station] when [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set to [Remote net (Ver.2 mode)] or [Remote net(Additional mode)].
Other precautions
When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172CPU or Q173CPU Use the motion controller CPU with the following production numbers. Q172CPU with N******* or later, Q173CPU with M******* or later For Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later For connecting the GOT to multiple CPUs (Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU), use CPUs with the function version B or later.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of CC-Link connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 9 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 8 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.9 CC-Link connection (via G4)
123
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
1. CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 4.1.10 Ethernet connection

Max. number of GOTs connected Max. connecti distance
128
Ethernet communication unit
100m
QCPU QnA/ACPU Motion controller CPU (A series)

A J61QBT11
128
(16 units or less are recommended.)
Ethernet cable
+
GT15

Max. segment length
+
10BASE-T cable 100BASE-TX cable
*1
GT15-J71E71-100
100 m
Max. number of *3 GOTs connected
456
456
Ethernet module
Available module
CPU series QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71 AJ71QE71N3-T AJ71QE71N-B5 AJ71QE71N-B2 AJ71QE71N-T AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71-B5 AJ71E71N3-T AJ71E71N-B5 AJ71E71N-B2 AJ71E71N-T AJ71E71N-B5T AJ71E71-S3 Ethernet module*4
MELSEC-Q series (Q mode)
MELSEC-QnA series
MELSEC-Q series (A mode) MELSEC-A series Motion controller CPU (A series)
*4
When the A series Ethernet module is used for the QCPU/QnACPU, the devices that can be monitored are only devices with the same name as the devices in the device range of the AnACPU. Note that the following devices cannot be monitored. Devices newly added to the QnACPU/QCPU Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (For the QCPU/QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay (M). However, the internal relay is accessed even if the latch relay or the step relay is specified.) File register (R)
124
4 23 5
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
89 67
ABCD
23 78 23 78
......
456
78
901 901 901
*2*5
A commercially Built in personal or available Ethernet computer or PC CPU module board is mounted.
128
(16 units or less are recommended.)
01 EF
Max. segment length
100 m
*1: Use a cable that supports an Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card to be used. *2: For available Ethernet boards/cards, refer to the following page. *3: The number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 running in personal computer is included. *5: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *6: Connect the PC CPU module to an Ethernet module on any of the other base units.
A1SJ71QE71N3-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5T A1SJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2 A1SJ71E71N3-T A1SJ71E71N-B5 A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71E71N-T A1SJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71E71-B5-S3 A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.10 Ethernet connection
Available Ethernet board/card for GT SoftGOT1000
Manufacturer 3Com Corporation Model EthernetLink LAN PC Card Ethernet board included in personal computer as standard Remark Ethernet board/card Ethernet board
Other precautions
When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series) For Q172CPU or Q173CPU Use the motion controller CPU with the following production numbers. Q172CPU with N******* or later, Q173CPU with M******* or later For Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN For using the SV13, SV22, and SV43, use a motion controller with the following OS for the motion controller CPU installed. SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later, SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later For connecting the GOT to multiple CPUs (Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU), use CPUs with the function version B or later. When the A series Ethernet module is used for the QnACPU, the QnACPU cannot be monitored with GT SoftGOT1000.
Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 2 in GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating For connection method with GT SoftGOT1000 Manual (SH-080602ENG) For controllers that can be monitored by GT Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design SoftGOT1000 and accessible range Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) * For restrictions and precautions on controllers connected to a GOT, refer to the manual for each controller.
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of Ethernet connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range
Chapter 9 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
4.1 MITSUBISHI Programmable Controller 4.1.10 Ethernet connection
125
GLOSSARY
Related Manuals
The target device of a twisted pair cable differs depending on the Ethernet network system configuration to be used. Connect the cable to the system devices, including Ethernet modules, hubs, and transceivers, according to the Ethernet network system to be used. Communication via network system A GOT cannot access a programmable controller on other network via a programmable controller (the network module, Ethernet module, and others) on the network where the GOT is connected. When connecting to the QnA(S)CPU type For the Ethernet module (QnA series) and programmable controller CPU (QnA/QnASCPU types), use the function version B or later. When connecting multiple network devices (including a GOT) to the same segment When multiple network devices (including a GOT) are connected to the same segment, the network load may increase, and the communication speed may slow down between the GOT and a programmable controller. The following actions can improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Use the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps). Reduce the GOT monitoring points. The motion controller (A series) cannot be connected to the remote I/O station. Applicable range for monitoring A GOT can monitor a programmable controller on the network where the GOT is conncted and on the other networks. The routing parameter setting is required when monitoring a programmable controller CPU on the other networks.
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.2 Other MITSUBISHI controllers 4.2.1 Inverter connection

*2
Inverter
FR-DU04
CONTROL PANEL Hz A V EX T RE V PU FWD MON
D-sub 9-pin (male) Depends on the specification of a connected equipment
GT15
FREQROL500 series FREQROL700 series
GT11
Relay cable

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m *1: When using GT11H-C -37P *2: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155
Connectable models
Model FREQROL-S500/E500/A500/F500 FREQROL-A700/F700 RS-422 RS-232


Clock setting of GOT The inverter does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed). Do not change various communication parameters of the inverter with a GOT. When the communication parameters of the inverter are changed, the GOT cannot communicate with the inverter. Be sure to use GD for the screen switching device and system information device.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of inverter connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 32 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 31 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
126
MEMO

127
GLOSSARY
4.2.2 Servo amplifier connection

1) RS-232
D-sub 9-pin (female) Depends on the specification of a connected equipment
RS-232 cable
Built in GOT
+
GT15
+
Servo amplifier
GT11
Relay cable
O PE N
Built in GOT
V W
MELSERVO-J2-Super series MELSERVO-J2M series MELSERVO-J3 series

30: 3m 30: 3m 60: 6m
Handy GOT
2) RS-422
RS-422 cable
*2
or
+
GT15
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT11
Relay cable

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Built in GOT
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m *1: When using GT11H-C -37P *2 Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155 .
Handy GOT
Connectable models
Model MELSERVO-J3 series MELSERVO-J2-Super series MR-J3 A MR-J2S- A MR-J2S- CP MELSERVO-J2M series MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M DU RS-422 RS-232

Series GT11 Bus connection Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections GT115 GT115 -Q -Q BD BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA GOT model to be used
128
4.2 Other MITSUBISHI controllers 4.2.2 Servo amplifier connection
1
Clock setting of GOT The servo amplifier does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] are set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed).
Other precautions
Test operation of servo amplifier with GOT When communication between a GOT and a servo amplifier is aborted for 0.5[ms] or more during the test operation of the servo amplifier, the servo amplifier makes the servo motor decelerate and stop, and then the servo motor locks. During the test operation of the servo amplifier, keep the communication between the GOT and servo amplifier executed with monitoring the servo amplifier status and others.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of servo amplifier connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 33 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 32 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.2 Other MITSUBISHI controllers 4.2.2 Servo amplifier connection
129
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.2.3 CNC
Direct CPU connection
1)RS-232
Built in GOT
RS-232 cable or
+
GT15
GT15-RS2-9P
+
Created by the user
Built in GOT
GT11
*3
or
A commercially available RS-232 GT SoftGOT1000 board is mounted. (DOS/V personal

computer) (PC CPU module) + License key for GT SoftGOT1000
MELDAS C6/C64

30: 3m 30: 3m 60: 6m
Handy GOT
*3: Not required for using the PC CPU module.
2)RS-422
*2
GT15
F311 cable
GT01-C R4-25P
30: 3m 100: 10m 200: 20m 300: 30m
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT11
Relay cable
Built in GOT F311 cable Created by the user *1 GT11H-C -37P

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT
*1: Required for using GT11H-C -37P. *2: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155
Connectable models
Connection type Series FCA C6 FCA C64 Model GT15 MELDAS C6/C64 Direct CPU connection GT11 GT SoftGOT1000

130
4.2 Other MITSUBISHI controllers 4.2.3 CNC

Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use the NC system software version D0 or later.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of CNC connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT For connection method with GT SoftGOT1000 For controllers that can be monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 34 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 33 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
131
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
Chapter 2 in GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual (SH-080602ENG)
SOFTWARE
GOT
MELSECNET/10 connection
1) Optical loop
MELDAS C6/C64
Fiber-optic cable MELSECNET/H communication or unit MELSECNET/10 communication unit
+
......
GT15-J71LP23-25
+
GT15
GT15-75J71LP23-Z
2) Coaxial bus
Extension unit
Coaxial cable
MELSECNET/H communication or unit
+
GT15-J71BR13 GT15-75J71BR13-Z
GT15
Connectable models
Connection type Series FCA C6 FCA C64 Model GT15 MELDAS C6/C64 MELSECNET/10 connection GT11 GT SoftGOT1000
Available module for MITSUBISHI CNC connection

Series MELDAS C6/C64 MELSECNET/H module (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 module Optical loop FCU6-EX879 FCU6-EX878 Coaxial bus
132

Creating network For the network including a GOT, create a MELSECNET/H network system (programmable controller to programmable controller network) with the MELSECNET/10 mode or a MELSECNET/10 network system (programmable controller to programmable controller network). The GOT cannot be connected to the following network. MELSECNET/H network system (remote I/O network) MELSECNET/10 network system (remote I/O network) Applicable range for monitoring A GOT can monitor only CNC on the same network No. Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use the NC system software version E0 or later. Starting GOT with CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection) When the CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection) is used, the data link starts in about 10 minutes after starting the GOT. When an error related to the network occurs as the system alarm When an error related to the network occurs as the system alarm with CNC connection (MELSECNET/ 10 connection), the displayed system alarm cannot be erased even though the error factor is removed. Restart a GOT to erase the system alarm.
Correctly solder the connector for the coaxial cable. Incomplete soldering causes malfunctions. When changing the switch setting after installing the MELSECNET/10 communication unit on a GOT, reset the GOT.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of CNC connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 33 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
133
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
CC-Link (intelligent device station) connection

MELDAS C6/C64
CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link communication unit
......
Extension unit
+
GT15-J61BT13 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
+
GT15
Connectable models
Connection type Series FCA C6 FCA C64 Model CC-Link (intelligent device station) connection GT15 MELDAS C6/C64 GT11 GT SoftGOT1000

Series MELDAS C6/C64 FCU6-HR865 CC-Link module

When CNC is a terminating station, be sure to connect a terminating resistor. When using cyclic transmission (1) I/O signals from/to master station Do not turn on reserved output signals among output signals from the master station to a GOT (remote output: RY). When the reserved output signals are turned on, the CNC system may malfunction. (2) CC-Link mode The CNC is not applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2. When using transient transmission (1) Accessible range for monitoring A GOT can access the CNC with the CC-Link module set as the master or local station. The GOT cannot access the other networks via the CC-Link module. Starting GOT with CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) When the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) is used, the data link starts in about 10 minutes after starting the GOT. When an error related to the network occurs as the system alarm When an error related to the network occurs as the system alarm with CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)), the displayed system alarm cannot be erased even though the error factor is removed. Restart a GOT to erase the system alarm. Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use the NC system software version D0 or later.
When changing the switch setting after installing the GT15-75J64BT13-Z type CC-Link communication unit on a GOT, reset the GOT.
134
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of CNC connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 33 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
SOFTWARE
135
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
GOT
Ethernet connection
Ethernet cable
+
GT15
MELDAS C6/C64
+
......
Extension unit
GT15-J71E71-100
*1
10BASE-T cable 100BASE-TX cable
or
A commercially available Ethernet board is mounted.
*1: Not required for using the PC CPU module.
Connectable models
Connection type Series FCA C6 FCA C64 Model GT15 MELDAS C6/C64 Ethernet connection GT11 GT SoftGOT1000

Series MELDAS C6/C64 FCU6-EX875 Ethernet module

Version of CNC For MELDAS C6/C64, use the NC system software version D0 or later.
A GOT cannot access the CNC on the other networks via the CNC (the network module, Ethernet module, and others) on the network where the GOT is connected. When multiple network devices (including a GOT) are connected to the same segment, the network load may increase, and the communication speed may slow down between the GOT and CNC. The following actions can improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Use high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps). Reduce the GOT monitoring points. Connecting Ethernet cable Keep a distance between the Ethernet cable and power line or electric power line, and run the Ethernet cable through ferrite cores (included) at positions close to control devices so that the Ethernet cable is not affected by noise.
136
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of CNC connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with GT SoftGOT1000 For controllers that can be monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 2 in GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual (SH-080602ENG) Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 33 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
137
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.2.4 Multiple-GT11/GT10 connection

System configuration 1) When connecting the first GOT to a controller via RS-422
RS-422 cable RS-232 cable
*7
A/QnACPU (1)
GT01-C R4-25P *1
30: 3m 200: 20m 100: 10m 300: 30m
GT01-C30R2-9S (3m) GT11 GT11 Relay cable External connection cable
or
GT01-C R4-8P *2
10: 1m 100: 10m 300: 30m 30: 3m 200: 20m
FX series (2)

30: 3m 30: 3m 60: 6m
Handy GOT
IN
0 1
2 3 6 7
4 5 P OW E R R UN BAT T ER R O R
OU T
F X3U-16M FX -16M
0 1 4 5
2 3 6 7
.....
RS-422 cable RS-232 cable
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3U, FX1N-422BD, FX3UC FX2N-422BD
GT10-C R4-25P *1
30: 3m 100: 10m
or
GT10-C R4-8P
10: 1m 30: 3m 100: 10m *2
GT10 *8
GT10-C R2-6P
30: 3m
GT10 *6
2) When connecting the first GOT to a controller via RS-232

RS-232 cable QCPU (3)
Cable
*7
RS-422 cable
GT01-C30R2-6P (3m) *3
Created by the user Relay cable GT11
GT11 External connection cable
or
FX series (4) GT01-C30R2-9S (3m) *4
0 IN 4 7 5 6 3 1 2 PO WE R RU N BAT T E RRO R OU T 0 3 1 2

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m 30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
.....
RS-232 cable
FX1N-232BD, FX2NC-232ADP, FX3U-232BD, FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232BD, FX3U-232ADP
Handy GOT
7 5
F X3U-16M FX -16M
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3U, FX3UC
GT10-C30R2-6P (3m) *3
RS-232 cable
or
GT10 Created by the user *4 GT10-C R2-6P
30: 3m
GT10 *6
*1: For connecting to (1) *2: For connecting to (2) *3: For connecting to (3) *4: For connecting to (4) *5: Required for using GT11H-C -37P. *6: RS-232 buit-in product *7: GT11 and GT10 are not used at the same time. *8: GT1020-LBL is not available.
138
4.2 Other MITSUBISHI controllers 4.2.4 Multiple-GT11/GT10 connection


When connecting a GOT to the MITSUBISHI programmable controller with the following connection type, the multiple-GT11/GT10 connection function can be used. Direct CPU connection GOT communication timing Adjust the communication timing as described below so that GOTs communicate with a controller (MITSUBISHI programmable controller) in number order (starting from the first connected GOT) after the GOTs are turned on. When the communication is disabled, retry the communication. A communication error occurs when the time-out period passes. (1) When turning on GOTs simultaneously When it takes a long time to start communication of the second GOT, a communication error may occur. For the time that the startup screen is displayed, set the longer time for the second GOT than the first GOT. (Example: First GOT (5 minutes) Second GOT (10 minutes)) A GOT does not communicate with a controller during displaying the startup screen. For adjusting the time of the startup screen, refer to GT11 User's Manual (JY997D17501C). (2) When turning on GOTs respectively When the first GOT is turned on sometime after the second GOT is turned on, the communication start of the second GOT delays. Therefore, a communication error may occur on the second GOT. Turn on a controller, the first GOT, and the second GOT, in that order. Using the function with FA transparent function When connecting multiple GOTs, the FA transparent function cannot be used with connecting a personal computer to the RS-232 interface or USB interface of the GOT. Conditions for making GOTs stop monitoring in the system where multiple GOTs are connected In the system where multiple GOTs are connected, when the following operations are executed on the first GOT (close to the programmable controller), the first GOT stops monitoring, and the second GOT also stops monitoring. When the first GOT restarts monitoring, the second GOT also restarts monitoring. (1) When the project data is downloaded/uploaded, or OS is installed with GT Designer2 (2) When a GOT is set up When power-off of a programmable controller occurs in the system where multiple GOTs are connected When the power-off of a programmable controller occurs or when the communication between a programmable controller and the first GOT stops because of the communication cable disconnection and others, time-out wait occurs for the communication request from the second GOT to the first GOT. As a result, it takes a long time to restart communications between the programmable controller and the first GOT.
SOFTWARE
139
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
GOT
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of multipleGT11/GT10 connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT *
Chapter 41 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 35 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101)
140
MEMO

141
GLOSSARY
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.1 Connection type

The following shows connection with a third party programmable controller. The available connection type and GOT differ according to the manufacturer. For details, refer to the section for each programmable controller.
1)RS-232
RS-232 cable
D-sub 9-pin (female) Depends on the specification of a connected equipment
Built in GOT
or
+
GT15
+
Third party programmable controller
GT11
A commercially Built in personal available or computer or Ethernet board PC CPU module is mounted.
*3
Depends on the specification of a connected equipment
+
Relay cable
Built in GOT
GT10

30: 3m 30: 3m 60: 6m
Handy GOT
*2
2)RS-422
RS-422 cable
or
+
GT15
+ +
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT11
Built in GOT
GT10
Relay cable

*1
GT11H-C -37P
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT
*1: Required for using GT11H-C -37P. *2: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155 . *3: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *5: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other base units.
142
Third party programmable controller
3) Ethernet
GT15
+
Category 3,4, and 5 of shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP)
GT15-J71E71-100
*4
Built in personal or computer or PC CPU module
A commercially available Ethernet board is mounted.
*4: Not required for using the PC CPU module. *6: Connect the PC CPU module to a programmable controller CPU on any of the other base units.
143
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
Twisted pair cable
GOT
4.3.2 OMRON
For details of the system configuration, refer to "Connection type" in section 4.3.1.
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
GT15/GT11/GT10 Series Model Computer link connection RS-422 CPM1A CPM1 SYSMAC CPM CPM2A CPM2C SYSMAC CQM1H SYSMAC CJ1 SYSMAC CP1 SYSMAC CQM1H CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CP1H C200HX C200HG C200HE SYSMAC CS1 CS1H CS1G CS1D CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CQM1 C200HS C200H C1000H C2000H
*1
GT SoftGOT1000 Computer link connection RS-232 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232
Direct CPU connection
RS-232
RS-422 RS-232 RS-422
SYSMAC CVM1/CV
*1
CQM1-CPU11 does not have the RS-232 interface and cannot connect to a GOT.

144
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.2 OMRON
Available unit for computer link connection

Unit RS-422 C200H-LK202-V1 C500H-LK201-V1 CQM1-SCB41 CJ1W-SCU41 CJ1W-SCU21-V1+CP1W-EXT01 CS1W-SCB41 C200HW-COM03 C200HW-COM06 CP1W-CIF11 RS-232 C200H-LK201-V1 C500H-LK201-V1 CS1W-SCU21 CS1W-SCB21 CS1W-SCB41 CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU21-V1+CP1W-EXT01 CJ1W-SCU41 C200HW-COM02 C200HW-COM05 C200HW-COM06 CQM1-CIF01 CQM1-CIF02 CQM1-SCB41 CPM1-CIF01 CPM2C-CN111 CPM2C-CIF01-V1 CP1W-CIF01
Host link unit/ Communication unit/ Communication board

When connecting a GOT to the OMRON programmable controller, set a terminating resistor for the programmable controller. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor. Small-sized programmable controller that cannot be connected CQM1-CPU11 does not have the RS-232C interface and cannot connect to a GOT. Connecting to C200HE Connect a GOT to the C200HE via a rack type host link unit or a communication board. For C200HE-CPU11, a communication board cannot be installed. Use a host link unit.
FUNCTION
Polar difference between GOT and OMRON product For signal names, poles A and B are reversed between a GOT and an OMRON product.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking for OMRON programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT For connection method with GT SoftGOT1000 For controllers that can be monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 11 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 2 in GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual (SH-080602ENG) Chapter 10 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.2 OMRON
145
GLOSSARY
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.3.3 KEYENCE
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
Series KV-700 KV-1000 Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232


Unit Multi-communication unit KV-L20R KV-L20 RS-422 KV-L20R KV-L20 RS-232

When connecting a GOT to the KEYENCE programmable controller, set terminating resistors for the programmable controller and a GOT.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking for KEYENCE programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 12 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 11 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
146
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.3 KEYENCE
4.3.4 SHARP
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
Series JW-21CU JW-31CUH JW-50CUH JW-22CU JW-32CUH JW-33CUH JW-70CUH JW-100CUH JW-100CU Z-512J *1 Either RS-422 or RS-232 interface can be selected. Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232
*1
*1


Unit Link unit JW-21CM JW-10CM ZW-10CM RS-422 RS-232 -

For connecting to a GOT, use a link unit applicable to the JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH, and JW-33CUH. When connecting a GOT to the SHARP programmable controller, set a terminating resistor for the programmable controller. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking for SHARP programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 13 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 12 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.4 SHARP
147
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.3.5 JTEKT
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
Series PC3JG PC3J TOYOPUC series PC2J Model TIC-6088 TIC-6125 TIC-5339 TIC-5783 THC-5070 THC-5169 THC-5173 THC-2764 THC-2994 THC-5053 Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232
*1 *1
Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232

*1 *1
*1 *1
*1
The RS-232/RS-422 converter (TXU-2051) is required.


Unit Link unit THU-2755 THU-2927 THU-5139 RS-422 RS-232 -
148
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.5 JTEKT

When the programmable controller is a terminating station, do not connect a terminating resistor. Set the GOT terminating resistor setting to off. System configuration Communication may not be correctly executed in a system that has the programmable controllers applicable to the PC3J extended function and those inapplicable to the function. The system must have programmable controllers applicable to the PC3J extended function only or those inapplicable to the function only. Clock setting of GOT The GOT clock setting is enabled only for the programmable controller corresponding to the station No. set for the host address.
Other precautions
Setting station No. of programmable controller Make sure that the programmable controller corresponding to the station No. set for the host address exists in the system configuration. System alarm The system alarm can be displayed only for the programmable controller set as the host address. When connecting a GOT to the programmable controller compatible with the PC3J extended function, only the system alarm of the program No.1 can be displayed. Version of PC3J For PC3J, use the version 2.1 or later.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking for JTECT programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 15 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 13 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.5 JTEKT
149
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.3.6 TOSHIBA
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
Series Model T2(PU224) T2E PROSEC T series T2N T3 T3H V series *1 model 3000(S3) model 2000(S2)
*1 *1
Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232
Either RS-422 or RS-232 interface can be selected.


When connecting a GOT to the TOSHIBA programmable controller, set a terminating resistor for the programmable controller. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of TOSHIBA programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 14 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 14 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
150
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.6 TOSHIBA
4.3.7 HITACHI IES

Connectable GOT
Connectable models
Series Model H-302(CPU2-03H) H-702(CPU2-07H) H-1002(CPU2-10H) H-2002(CPU-20H) H-4010(CPU3-40H) H-300(CPU-03Ha) H-700(CPU-07Ha) H-2000(CPU-20Ha) H-200(CPU-02H, CPE-02H) H-250(CPU21-02H) H-252(CPU22-02H) H-252B(CPU22-02HB) H-252C(CPU22-02HC) H-252C(CPE22-02HC) H-20DR H-28DR H-40DR H-64DR H-20DT H-28DT H-40DT H-64DT HL-40DR HL-64DR EH-CPU104 EH-CPU208 EH-CPU308 EH-CPU316 Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232
Large-sized H series
*1
H series board type
EH-150 series
*1
Either RS-422 or RS-232 interface can be selected.

Series GT11 Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection GT115 GT115 -Q -Q BD GOT model to be used

Unit Intelligent serial port module COMM-H COMM-2H RS-422 COMM-H COMM-2H RS-232
Precautions
GLOSSARY
Precautions on system
When connecting a GOT to the intelligent serial port module, connect a terminating resistor to the intelligent serial port module. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor.
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.7 HITACHI IES
151
BDQ, GT115
-Q
BDA
FUNCTION
H-200 to 252 series
SOFTWARE
GOT
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking for HITACHI IES programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 16 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 15 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
152
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.7 HITACHI IES
4.3.8 HITACHI
Connectable GOT
GOT
Connectable models
Series S10V Model LQP510 LQP520 LQP800 LQP000 S10mini LQP010 LQP011 LQP120 Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232
2
SOFTWARE
3
FUNCTION

4
RS-232 LQE560 LQE060 LQE160

Unit Communication module LQE565 LQE165 RS-422
5
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of HITACHI programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 17 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 16 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
6
7
GLOSSARY
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.8 HITACHI
153
4.3.9 FUJI FA
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
GT15 Series Model Computer link connection RS-422 F55 F70 F120S F140S F15 S RS-232 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232 Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232 GT11 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232
MICREX-F


Unit RS-232C interface card RS-232C/485 interface capsule General-purpose interface module RS-422 FFK120A-C10 NC1L-RS4 FFU120B RS-232 NV1L-RS2 FFK120A-C10 NC1L-RS2 FFU120B
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of FUJI FA programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 18 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 17 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
154
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.9 FUJI FA
4.3.10 MATSUSHITA
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
Series FP0-C16CT FP0-C32CT FP1-C24C FP1-C40C FP2 FP2SH FP3 FP5 FP10(S) FP10SH FP-M(C20TC) FP-M(C32TC) FPFP-X Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232
Series GT11
Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection GT115 GT115 -Q -Q BD BDQ, GT115
GOT model to be used
-Q
BDA

Unit RS-422 AFP2462 AFP3462 AFP5462 AFPX-COM1 AFPX-COM2 AFPX-COM4 RS-232
Computer communication unit
AFPX-COM3
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of MATSUSHITA programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 18 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH080532ENG)
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.10 MATSUSHITA
155
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.3.11 YASKAWA
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
GT15/GT11 Series Computer link connection RS-422 GL120 GL130 GL60S GL60H GL70H CP-9200SH CP-9300MS MP920 MP930 MP940 PROGIC-8 CP-9200(H) MP2200 MP2300 *1 Available only for GT15.
*1
GT SoftGOT1000 Ethernet
*1
Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232
Ethernet
RS-232
*1


Unit GT15/GT11 RS-422 JAMSC120NOM27100 JAMSC-IF612 217IF 217IF-01 RS-232 JAMSC-IF60 JAMSC-IF61 CP-217IF 217IF 217IF-01 218IF-01 GT SoftGOT1000 RS-422 RS-232 JAMSC-IF60 JAMSC-IF61 CP-217IF 217IF 217IF-01 218IF-01
MEMOBUS Module/ Communications Module
Available unit for Ethernet connection

Unit Communications Module 218IF, 218IF-01 Model
156
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.11 YASKAWA

When connecting a GOT to the YASKAWA programmable controller, connect a terminating resistor to the programmable controller as necessary. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor. The target divice of a twisted pair cable differs depending on the Ethernet network system configuration to be used. Connect the cable to the system devices, including Ethernet modules, hubs, and transceivers, according to the Ethernet network system to be used. Communication via network system A GOT cannot access a programmable controller on the other networks via a programmable controller (the network module, Ethernet module, and others) on the network where the GOT is connected. When connecting multiple network devices (including a GOT) to the same segment When multiple network devices (including a GOT) are connected to the same segment, the network load may increase, and the communication speed may slow down between the GOT and a programmable controller. The following actions can improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Use the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps). Reduce the GOT monitoring points.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of YASKAWA programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 20 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 19 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.11 YASKAWA
157
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.3.12 YOKOGAWA
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
GT15/GT11 Series Model Computer link connection Direct CPU connection Ethernet
*2
GT SoftGOT1000 Computer link connection Direct CPU connection Ethernet
RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 FA500 FA500 F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 NFCP100 STARDOM NFJT100 *1 *2 Either RS-422 or RS-232 interface can be selected. Available only for GT15.
*2 *1 *2
RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232
FA-M3

Series GT11 Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection GT115 GT115 -Q e-Q BD BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA GOT model to be used

Unit LC02-0N F3LC11-2N PC link module RS-422 LC01-0N LC02-0N F3LC01-1N F3LC11-1N F3LC11-1F F3LC12-1F RS-232

Unit Ethernet Interface Module Model F3LE01-5T, F3LE11-0T, F3LE12-0T
158
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.12 YOKOGAWA

Precautions for connecting to FA-M3 For connecting the GOT to the programming tool interface connector with the CPU port/D-sub 9-pin conversion cable, the GOT cannot connect to the F3SP10, F3SP20, F3SP30, and F3SP36. The F3SP10 is not applicable to the PC link module (F3LC11-2N). A GOT cannot connect to the F3P10 via the RS-422 interface. Precautions for connecting to STARDOM Dual-redundant configuration When the dual-redundant configration is used with STARDOM, the GOT cannot connect to STARDOM. System alarm Programmable controller errors in the system alarm are not displayed. Clock setting of GOT STARDOM does not have the clock data write/read function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] are set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed). When connecting a GOT to the PC link module, connect a terminating resistor for the PC link module. The GOT has a built-in terminating resistor. The target divice of a twisted pair cable differs depending on the Ethernet network system configuration to be used. Connect the cable to the system devices, including Ethernet modules, hubs, and transceivers, according to the Ethernet network system to be used. Communication via network system A GOT cannot access a programmable controller on the other networks via a programmable controller (the network module, Ethernet module, and others) on the network where the GOT is connected. When connecting multiple network devices (including a GOT) to the same segment When multiple network devices (including a GOT) are connected to the same segment, the network load may increase, and the communication speed may slow down between the GOT and a programmable controller. The following actions can improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Use the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps). Reduce the GOT monitoring points.
Set the switch of the PC link module before installing the PC link module on a base unit. Polar difference between GOT and YOKOGAWA product For signal names, poles A and B are reversed between a GOT and a YOKOGAWA product. When connecting a GOT to YOKOGAWA programmable controller, devices to be set for objects must be in the device range of YOKOGAWA programmable controller. When a device outside the device range is set for an object, an invalid value is displayed for the object. (The system alarm is not displayed).
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of YOKOGAWA programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT *
Chapter 20 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.12 YOKOGAWA
159
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.3.13 ALLEN-BRADLEY
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
GT15/GT11 Computer Direct CPU link connection connection RS422 SLC500-20 SLC500-30 SLC500-40 SLC5/01 SLC5/02 SLC5/03 SLC5/04 SLC5/05 1761-L10BWA 1761-L10BWB 1761-L16AWA 1761-L16BWA 1761-L16BWB 1761-L16BBB 1761-L32AWA 1761-L32BWA 1761-L32BWB 1761-L32BBB 1761-L32AAA 1761-L20AWA-5A 1761-L20BWA-5A 1761-L20BWB-5A 1762-L24BWA 1764-LSP 1756-L 1756-L1M1 1756-L1M2 1756-L1M3 1756-L61 1756-L62 1756-L63 1756-L55M12 1756-L55M13 1756-L55M14 1756-L55M16 1756-L55M22 1756-L55M23 1756-L55M24 RS232 RS422 RS232 GT10 EtherComputer EtherDirect CPU net link net connection (Soon connection (Soon to be to be suppor- RS- RS- RS- RS- suppor422 232 422 232 *4 ted) ted)*4
Series
Model
SLC500 series*1
MicroLogix1000 series (digital CPU)*1
MicroLogix1000 series (analog CPU)*1*2*3 MicroLogix1200 series*1 MicroLogix1500 series*1
ControlLogix5000 series
*4
160
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.13 ALLEN-BRADLEY
GT15/GT11 Computer Direct CPU link connection connection RS422 1769-L31 1769-L32E CompactLogix series 1769-L32C 1769-L35E 1769-L35CR FlexLogix series *1 *2 *3 *4
*4 *4
GT10 EtherComputer net link (Soon connection to be suppor- RS- RS422 232 ted)*4 Direct CPU connection RS422 RS232 Ethernet (Soon to be supported)*4
Series
Model
RS232
RS422
RS232


Unit EtherNet/IP communication module Model 1756-ENBT, 1788-ENBT
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking for AllenBradley programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 22 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 21 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.13 ALLEN-BRADLEY
161
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
1794-L33 *4 1794-L34 Connectable to the DH485 network via Adapter (1770-KF3). The CPU of series C or later is applicable for connecting to the DH485 network. (The DH485 protocol is not supported for series B or earlier.) The CPU of series D or later is applicable to the one-on-one connection. (The DF1 half duplex is not supported for series C or earlier.) Available only for GT15.EtherNet/IP (PCCC protocol) is supported.
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.3.14 SIEMENS
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
GT15/11 Series Computer link connection RS-422 SIMATIC S7-200 series SIMATIC S7-300 series SIMATIC S7-400 series RS-232 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232 Computer link connection RS-422 RS-232 GT10 Direct CPU connection RS-422 RS-232

GT115 -Q BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA GT1030-LBD2/GT1030-LBDW2, GT1020-LBD2/GT1020-LBDW2 GT1030-LBD/GT1030-LBDW, GT1020-LBD/GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW (For the GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW, the MELSEC-FXCPU connection is available only.)

Alarm list display function (system alarm) for GOT When a GOT is connected to the SIEMENS programmable controller, programmable controller errors cannot be displayed with the alarm list display function (system alarm). (Check the errors with monitoring the SIEMENS programmable controller with the GOT.) At system start-up (1) At power-on Power on all the programmable controller CPU before powering on a GOT. When powering on the programmable controller CPU after powering on a GOT, reboot the GOT. (2) At power-off of other station programmable controller CPU When any of the other programmable controller CPUs (that are not connected to HMI Adapter) is powered off, a GOT stops monitoring. When rebooting the GOT, the GOT can start monitoring. (Even though the programmable controller is powered on again, the GOT does not restart monitoring.)
162
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.14 SIEMENS
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking for SIEMENS programmable controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 23 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 22 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.3 Third Party Programmable Controller 4.3.14 SIEMENS
163
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.4 Microcomputer connection

1)RS-232
RS-232 cable
Depends on the specification of a connected equipment D-sub 9-pin (female)
Built in GOT
GT15
Created by the user RS-232 cable

GT11
Built in GOT
Microcomputer board, personal computer, and others
GT10 *3
Created by the user Relay cable

Built in GOT
Q25HCPU
QX10
QX41
QX41
QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
PULL
USB
PULL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
GT11H-C
30: 3m
-37P GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m *2
Handy GOT
2)RS-422
RS-422 cable
Depends on the specification of a connected equipment D-sub 9-pin (male)
or
GT15
Created by the user RS-422 cable

GT11
Built in GOT
GT10 *4
Created by the user Relay cable External connection cable Built in GOT Created by the user *1 GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
-37P
GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT
*1: Required for using GT11H-C -37P. *2: Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155 . *3: RS-232 built-in product *4: RS-422 built-in product

GT115 -Q BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA GT1030-LBD2/GT1030-LBDW2, GT1020-LBD2/GT1020-LBDW2 GT1030-LBD/GT1030-LBDW, GT1020-LBD/GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW (For the GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW, the MELSEC-FXCPU connection is available only.)
164

Virtual device in GOT The virtual device in a GOT is used for the microcomputer connection. (Devices for a programmable controller are not used.)
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of microcomputer connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 24 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 23 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
165
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.1 Connection type

The following shows connection with a temperature controller. The available connection type and GOT differ according to the manufacturer. For details, refer to the section for each temperature controller.
1)RS-232
RS-232 cable
Depends on the specification of a connected equipment*1 D-sub 9-pin (female)
Built in GOT
or
+
+
Temperature controller Relay cable
GT15
GT11
Built in GOT Created by the user *2 GT11H-C

30: 3m
-37P
GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m *3
Handy GOT
2)RS-422
RS-422 cable
Depends on the specification of a connected equipment*1 D-sub 9-pin (male)
or
+
GT15
GT15-RS2T4-9P
GT11
Relay cable

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
-37P
GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT
166
3) RS-485 [4-wire type]

RS-485 (4-wire) cable
D-sub 9-pin (male) Depends on the specification of a connected equipment*1 *4 *4
Temperature controller
+
GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE Built in GOT
GT15
GT11
Relay cable

30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
-37P
GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m 100: 10m
Handy GOT*5
RS-485 (2-wire) cable

Depends on the specification Terminal of a connected equipment*1
+
GT15-RS4-TE Relay cable
+
GT15

30: 3m *1:
-37P
GT11H-C
30: 3m 60: 6m
Handy GOT*6
The terminal differs depending on the manufacturer of the temperature controller to be connected. (Terminal block) (Modular type)
*2: Required for using GT11H-C *3: *4:
-37P. .
Use GT15-RS4-9S for using GT155
*5: *6:
Only the YAMATAKE and YOKOGAWA temperature controllers can be connected to the Handy GOT with RS-485 [4-wire type]. Only the FUJI SYS temperature controller can be connected to the Handy GOT with RS-485 [2-wire type].
167
GLOSSARY
The available communication unit differ depending on the temperature controller connected. For available communication units, refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
4) RS-485 [2-wire type]
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
RS-422/485 communication or unit
GOT
4.5.2 OMRON
Connectable GOT
Connectable models
Model E5AN E5EN THERMAC NEO E5CN E5GN INPANEL NEO *1 E5ZN GT15 RS-485 (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) When the RS-485 interface of the temperature controller is used, use the RS-232/RS-485 converter.
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
GT11 RS-232
*1
RS-422
RS-485
RS-422
RS-232
*1


When connecting a GOT to the OMRON temperature controller, set a terminating resistor for the temperature controller. For the GOT, set a terminating resistor with the DIP switches of the RS-422/485 serial communication unit. Clock setting of GOT The temperature controller does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed).
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of OMRON temperature controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT *
Chapter 24 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG) Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 25 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101)
168
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.2 OMRON
4.5.3 SHINKO
Connectable GOT
GOT
Connectable models
Series ACS-13A series DCL-33A series JC series JCM-33A series FCR-100 series FCD-100 series FCR-23A series PC-900 series FIR series JIR-301-M series *1 *2 ACS-13A DCL-33AJCS-33AJCR-33AJCR-33AJCR-33AFCR-13AFCR-15AFCD-13AFCD-15AFCR-23APC935Model / / / / / , , , C5 , C5 , C5 , C5 , C5 RS-485 RS-422 RS-232
2
SOFTWARE
/M,
, C5
*2
3
FUNCTION
/M, C /M, C /M, C /M, C /M, C /M, C

*1
JIR-301-M
, C5
*2
A GOT can connect to only the indicating controller with RS-232 serial communcation function. When the RS-485 interface of the indicating controller is used, use the RS-232/RS-485 converter.

Series GT11 Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection GT115 GT115 -Q e-Q BD BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA GOT model to be used

Clock setting of GOT The indicating controller does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed).
Other precautions
Setting station No. of indicating controller Make sure that the indicating controller corresponding to the station No. set for the host address exists in the system configuration.
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.3 SHINKO
169
GLOSSARY
PC955- /M, C FIR-201-M,C
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of SHINKO indicating controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 26 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 25 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
170
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.3 SHINKO
4.5.4 CHINO
Connectable GOT
GOT
Connectable models
Series LT300 series LT400 series DZ1000 series DZ2000 series LT230 series LT830 series GT120 series *1 *2 *3 Model LT350, LT370 LT450, LT470 DZ1000*3 DZ2000*3 LT230 LT830 GT120 GT15 RS-485 (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) When the RS-485 interface of the controller is used, use the RS-232/RS-485 converter. When the RS-422 interface of the controller is used, use the RS-232/RS-422 converter. Select a model for supporting the MODBUS communication function.
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1*2 *1*2 *1*2 *1*2 *1*2 *1*2
2
GT11 RS-232
*1*2
RS-422
RS-485
RS-422
RS-232
*1*2

4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.4 CHINO
171
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE

When connecting a GOT to the CHINO controller, set a terminating resistor for the controller. For the GOT, set a terminating resistor with the DIP switches of the RS-422/485 serial communication unit. Set the GOT terminating resistor setting to on. Clock setting of GOT The controller does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed).
Other precautions
Setting station No. of controller Make sure that the controller corresponding to the station No. set for the host address exists in the system configuration.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of the CHINO controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 27 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 26 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
172
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.4 CHINO
4.5.5 FUJI SYS

Connectable GOT
GOT
Connectable models
Series Model PXR3 PXR4 PXR PXR5 PXR9 PXG4 PXG PXG5 PXG9 PXH *1 PXH9 GT15 RS-485 (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) When the RS-485 interface of the temperature controller is used, use the RS-232/RS-485 converter.
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
2
GT11 RS-232
*1
RS-422
RS-485
RS-422
RS-232
*1

4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.5 FUJI SYS
173
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE

When connecting a GOT to the FUJI SYS temperature controller, set a terminating resistor for the temperature controller. For the GOT, set a terminating resistor with the DIP switches of the RS-422/485 serial communication unit. Clock setting of GOT The temperature controller does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed).
FIX processing of temperature controller Do not turn off the temperature controller during FIX processing. Doing so may damage the data stored in a nonvolatile memory, resulting in the failure of the temperature controller.
Other precautions
Setting station No. of temperature controller Make sure that the temperature controller corresponding to the station No. set for the host address exists in the system configuration.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of FUJI SYS temperature controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 29 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 27 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
174
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.5 FUJI SYS
4.5.6 YAMATAKE
Connectable GOT
GOT
Connectable models
Model SDC10 SDC20/21 SDC30/31 SDC SDC40A/40B/40G SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36 DMC *1 DMC10 GT15 RS-485 (4-wire type) (4-wire type) (4-wire type) (4-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) (2-wire type) When the RS-485 interface of the temperature controller is used, use the RS-232/RS-485 converter.
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
2
GT11 RS-232
*1
RS-422
RS-485 (4-wire type) (4-wire type) (4-wire type) (4-wire type)
RS-422
RS-232
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1


When connecting a GOT to the YAMATAKE temperature controller, connect a terminating resistor for the temperature controller. For the GOT, set a terminating resistor with the DIP switches of the RS-422/485 serial communication unit. Clock setting of GOT The temperature controller does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed).
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.6 YAMATAKE
175
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of YAMATAKE temperature controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 28 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 28 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
176
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.6 YAMATAKE
4.5.7 YOKOGAWA
Connectable GOT
GOT
Connectable models
Series Model UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 UT130 UT150 UT152 UT155 UP100 UT2400 UT2800 GT15 RS-485 RS-422 RS-232 RS-485 GT11 RS-422 RS-232
2
SOFTWARE
3
(2-wire type/4-wire type)
*1
GREEN series
type)
*1
UT-100 series
(2-wire type) (4-wire type) (4-wire type)
UT-2000 series *1
When the RS-485 interface of the temperature controller is used, use the RS-232/RS-485 converter.

Series GT11 Connection type RS-232 or RS-422 connections Bus connection GT115 GT115 -Q -Q BD GOT model to be used

When connecting a GOT to the YOKOGAWA temperature controller, connect a terminating resistor for the temperature controller. For the GOT, set a terminating resistor with the DIP switches of the RS-422/485 serial communication unit. Clock setting of GOT The temperature controller does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed).
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.7 YOKOGAWA
177
GLOSSARY
BDQ, GT115
-Q
BDA
FUNCTION
(4-wire
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of YOKOGAWA temperature controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 30 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101) Chapter 29 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
178
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.7 YOKOGAWA
4.5.8 RKC
Connectable GOT
GOT
Connectable models
Series Model H-PCP-J H-PCP-A, CH-PCP-B SRZ series *1 *2 *3 Z-TIO, Z-DIO (2-wire type)*3
*2 *1 *2 *1
2
GT15 RS-485 (2-wire type) RS-422 RS-232 RS-485 GT11 RS-422 RS-232
SOFTWARE
SR Mini HG Series
3
FUNCTION
When the RS-485 interface of the temperature controller is used, use the RS-232/RS-485 converter. Use Communication Extension Module (Z-COM). Use Communication Extension Module (Z-COM) according to the system configuration.

4

Clock setting of GOT The temperature controller does not have the clock function. Even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for the clock setting, the setting is invalid (not processed).
5
When using RS-422 conversion unit Set [Communication Setting] in the utility so that the 5VDC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit via the RS-232 interface of the GOT. Polar difference between GOT and RKC product For signal names, poles A and B are reversed between a GOT and an RKC product.
6
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of RKC temperature controller connection For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range For connection method with Handy GOT *
Chapter 30 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG) Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 31 in Handy GOT User's Manual (JY997D20101)
7
GLOSSARY
4.5 Temperature Controller 4.5.8 RKC
179
4.6 Other Devices 4.6.1 Sound output

*1
Speaker with amplifier
Sound output unit
+
GT15-SOUT
GT15
*1: For connectable speakers with amplifier, refer to the following TECHNICAL BULLETIN. List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000series (T10-0039) For TECHNICAL BULLETIN, access the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE website. http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html

Setting of sound output function with GT Designer2 Set the sound file with GT Designer2 before connecting a speaker with amplifier to the GOT.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of the sound output For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 34 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
180
4.6 Other Devices 4.6.1 Sound output
4.6.2 External I/O

For input only

Operation panel
Connection cable External I/O unit
+
Created by the user GT15-DIO
GT15
For input and output

General input devices such as push button
Connection cable
Operation panel
Connector/terminal block converter module *1
Connection cable
External I/O unit
+
General output devices such as lamp and relay
Connection cable
+
A6TBY36-E A6TBY54-E
+
GT15
Created by the user GT15-DIO
Created by the user
*1: When the connector/terminal block converter module is used, the input points are up to 64 points.

Setting of external I/O function with GT Designer2 Set the operation panel with GT Designer2 before connecting an external I/O device.
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of external I/O For controllers that can be monitored by GOT and accessible range * Chapter 2 in GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) (SH-080530ENG) Chapter 35 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.6 Other Devices 4.6.2 External I/O
181
GLOSSARY
Related Manuals
FUNCTION
Created by the user
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.6.3 Bar code reader connection

1) RS-232
Bar code reader/ 2D code reader
*2
RS-232 cable
*2
Built in GOT
D-sub 9-pin (female)
GT15
*1
+
Built in GOT
Programmable controller
GT11
*1
*1: Depends on the connection type.
*2: For connectable bar code readers/2D code readers and system devices, refer to the following TECHNICAL BULLETIN. List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000series (T10-0039) For TECHNICAL BULLETIN, access the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE website. http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html

Setting of bar code function with GT Designer2 Set the bar code function and system information with GT Designer2 before connecting a bar code reader.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of bar code reader connection * For restrictions and precautions on controllers connected to a GOT, refer to the manual for each controller. Chapter 36 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
182
4.6 Other Devices 4.6.3 Bar code reader connection
MEMO
4.6 Other Devices 4.6.3 Bar code reader connection

183
GLOSSARY
4.6.4 Video/RGB connection

Coaxial cable Video/RGB input unit
*2
Created by the user

Connection cable Vision sensor Coaxial cable
+
GT15V-75V4 GT15V-75V4R1 GT15
Created by the user

Camcorder *1 and others
Created by the user
Analog RGB cable
Video/RGB nput unit
or
RGB output unit

*2
Created by the user

Connection cable Vision sensor Analog RGB cable
+
GT15V-75R1 GT15V-75V4R1
+
GT15V-75ROUT GT15
Created by the user
Created by the user
*1: For connectable camcorders, refer to the following TECHNICAL BULLETIN. List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000series (T10-0039) For TECHNICAL BULLETIN, access the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE website. http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html *2: Only GT1585V and GT1575V are supported.
Precautions Precautions on setup

Connecting to personal computer When connecting a personal computer, ground the ground cable of the personal computer.
Other precautions
Power supply of camcorder Depending on the camcorder type, a programmable controller and GOT may malfunction due to noise because of the power supply cable for a camcorder. In this case, attach the following line filter to the power supply line. Recommended line filter: TDK ZHC2203-11 (or equivalent products) Power supply of vision sensor When using a camcorder via the vision sensor, the power supply module is required according to the vision sensor type to be used. Selecting output of video signal The video signal can be output from both a power supply module and a camcorder according to the camcorder and system to be used. When video signals are output from both the camcorder and power supply module, the voltage levels for some of the the signals are reduced and images may not normally be displayed. In this case, output signals only from the camcorder. Powering on camcorder Power on the camcorder simultaneously with a GOT.
184
4.6 Other Devices 4.6.4 Video/RGB connection
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of video/ RGB connection * For restrictions and precautions on controllers connected to a GOT, refer to the manual for each controller. Chapter 37 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
4.6 Other Devices 4.6.4 Video/RGB connection
185
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
4.6.5 Printer connection

Printer unit
Printer
*2
USB cable
+
GT09-C30USB-5P
*1: Depends on the connection type.
+
GT15-PRN GT15
*1
*2: For connectable printers and system devices, refer to the following TECHNICAL BULLETIN. List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000series (T10-0039) For TECHNICAL BULLETIN, access the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE website. http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html

Connecting or disconnecting USB cable during printing When the USB cable is disconnected during printing, some printers hang depending on the PictBrige compatible printer model. In this case, turn on the main power of the printer again and reboot the printer. When printer is disabled During initialization at power-on of a PictBrige compatible printer, some models of the printers notify a GOT that the printer is enabled. For the printer models, when printing is started with the GOT, an error may occur in the printer, resulting in printing failures. When printing is disabled, restart the printer with the following procedure. 1) Disconnect the USB cable from the printer. 2) Turn off the printer. 3) Disconnect the power cable of the printer and completely stop the printer. 4) Connect the power cable to the printer. 5) Turn on the printer and wait until initialization on the printer is completed. 6) Connect the USB cable to the printer.
Related Manuals
For details of system configuration and connection cable For precautions and restrictions For outlined procedure and checking of printer connection * For restrictions and precautions on controllers connected to a GOT, refer to the manual for each controller. Chapter 38 in GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (SH-080532ENG)
186
4.6 Other Devices 4.6.5 Printer connection
4.7 Precautions
(2) When using RS-422 conversion unit Set [Communication Setting] in the utility so that the 5VDC power is supplied to the RS-422 conversion unit via the RS-232 interface of the GOT.
4.7 Precautions
187
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
(1) When installing communication unit or connecting cable Shut off all phases of the GOT power.
MEMO
188
4.7 Precautions
5. COMPLIANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS

This chapter describes the compliance with overseas standards for the GOT, communication interface, and option.
5. COMPLIANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS . . . . . 190
189
5. COMPLIANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS

The GOT is compliant with the following safety standards, including UL standard. For the latest compliance with overseas standards, access the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE website. http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html
UL:Underwriters Laboratories
EMC : EMC Directive LVD : Low Voltage Directive

Model GT1595-XTBA GT1595-XTBD GT1585V-STBA GT1585V-STBD GT1585-STBA GT1585-STBD GT1575V-STBA GT1575V-STBD GT1575-STBA GT1575-STBD GT1575-VTBA UL/cUL CE EMC LVD
Product name
GOT main unit
GT15
GT1575-VTBD GT1575-VNBA GT1575-VNBD GT1572-VNBA GT1572-VNBD GT1565-VTBA GT1565-VTBD GT1562-VNBA GT1562-VNBD GT1555-VTBD GT1555-QTBD GT1555-QSBD GT1550-QLBD : Compliant : Soon to be compliant
: Not compliant -: Not applied
190
1.
CE EMC LVD SOFTWARE GOT
Product name
Model GT1155-QTBDQ GT1155-QTBDA GT1155-QSBDQ GT1155-QSBDA
UL/cUL
GT11
GT1155-QSBD GT1155HS-QSBD GT1150-QLBDQ GT1150-QLBDA GT1150-QLBD
GOT main unit
GT1150HS-QLBD GT1030-LBD GT1030-LBDW GT1030-LBD2 GT1030-LBDW2 GT10 GT1020-LBD GT1020-LBDW GT1020-LBD2 GT1020-LBDW2 GT1020-LBL GT1020-LBLW GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS Bus connection unit GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L
3
FUNCTION
4
5
COMPLIANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS
Communication unit
GT15-RS2-9P Serial communication unit GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE RS-422 conversion unit Ethernet communication unit MELSECNET/H communication unit CC-Link communication unit GT15-RS2T4-9P GT15-RS2T4-25P GT15-J71E71-100 GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13 GT15-J61BT13 : Compliant : Soon to be compliant
6
7
GLOSSARY
191
Product name Printer unit Video input unit RGB input unit Video/RGB input unit Option unit RGB output unit CF card unit CF card extension unit Sound output unit External I/O unit
Model GT15-PRN GT15V-75V4 GT15V-75R1 GT15V-75V4R1 GT15V-75ROUT GT15-CFCD GT15-CFEX-C08SET GT15-SOUT GT15-DIO GT15-90XLTT GT15-80SLTT GT15-70SLTT GT15-70VLTT GT15-70VLTN GT15-60VLTT GT15-60VLTN GT15-FNB GT15-QFNB GT15-QFNB16M
UL/cUL
CE EMC LVD -
Backlight
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Option
GT15-QFNB32M GT15-QFNB48M GT11-50FNB GT15-MESB48M
*1
Compliant with the standard with the product built in the GOT.
: Compliant
: Soon to be compliant
192
1.
CE EMC *1 *1 LVD SOFTWARE GOT
Product name
Model GT15-90PSCB GT15-90PSGB GT15-90PSCW GT15-90PSGW GT15-80PSCB GT15-80PSGB GT15-80PSCW GT15-80PSGW GT15-70PSCB
UL/cUL
Protective sheet
GT15-70PSGB GT15-70PSCW GT15-70PSGW GT15-60PSCB GT15-60PSGB GT15-60PSCW GT15-60PSGW
3
FUNCTION
Option
GT15-50PSCB GT15-50PSGB GT15-50PSCW GT15-50PSGW USB environmental protection cover Stand GT15-UCOV GT15-90STAND GT15-80STAND GT15-70STAND GT15-50STAND GT05-MEM-32MC CF card GT05-MEM-64MC GT05-MEM-128MC GT05-MEM-256MC GT15-70ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-96 GT15-60ATT-97 GT15-60ATT-77 GT15-50ATT-85 : Compliant : Soon to be compliant
4
5
COMPLIANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS
Attachment
*1
Compliant with the standard with the product built in the GOT.
193
GLOSSARY
MEMO
194
6. EQUIPMENT, SOFTWARE, AND MANUALS

This chapter describes equipment, software, and manuals related to the GOT.
6. EQUIPMENT, SOFTWARE, AND MANUALS . . . . . . . . 196
195

Indication of GOT model
GT15 9 5
XT BA
Symbol Screen size 15" 9 12.1" 8 10.4" 7 8.4" 6 5.7" 5 4.5" 3 3.7" 2
Symbol Display color 5 256 colors or more 2 16 colors 0

Monochrome (white/black)
Symbol Mounting type V Video/RGB compatible None Panel-mounting type HS Handheld type
Symbol Resolution XGA X (1024 768 dots) SVGA S (800 600 dots) VGA V (640 480 dots) QVGA Q (320 240 dots) None (288 96 dots) (160 64 dots)
Symbol T N S L
Display device
TFT color (high intensity, wide angle view) TFT color STN color STN monochrome
Symbol A D L
Power supply specification
Symbol Communication interface Q *1 QCPU (Q mode)/ Motion controller CPU (Q series) Bus connection interface built-in QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) Bus connection interface built-in
100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 5VDC
A *1
2 RS-232 built-in None *2 RS-422 built-in

*1: Available only for GT115 -Q BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA *2: Aavailable only for GT10
*2
GT15 GT11 GT10
Full-spec model GOT which accommodates a wide range of applications in stand-alone or network environments Standard model GOT which offers a full array of basic functions for stand-alone use Basic model GOT which is compact and equipped with functions of displays
Symbol W None
GT10 backlight White backlight Green backlight
GOT main unit

Model
GT1595
GT1595-XTBA GT1595-XTBD GT1585V-STBA GT1585V-STBD GT1585-STBA GT1585-STBD GT1575V-STBA GT1575V-STBD GT1575-STBA GT1575-STBD GT1575-VTBA GT1575-VTBD GT1575-VNBA GT1575-VNBD GT1572-VNBA GT1572-VNBD GT1565-VTBA GT1565-VTBD GT1562-VNBA GT1562-VNBD GT1555-VTBD
Screen size [resolution]

15" XGA [1024 768 dots] 12.1" SVGA [800 600 dots]
Display section
Display color
Power type
100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC
Memory size
9MB
Remark
Video/RGB compatible
TFT color LCD 65536 colors (High intensity and wide angle view) TFT color LCD (High intensity and wide angle view) TFT color LCD (High intensity and wide angle view) TFT color LCD (High intensity and wide angle view) TFT color LCD (High intensity and wide angle view)
GT1585
65536 colors
9MB
Video/RGB compatible 9MB
10.4" SVGA [800 600 dots]
65536 colors
GT15
GT157
TFT color LCD (High intensity and wide angle view) 65536 colors
9MB
10.4" VGA [640 480 dots]
5MB 5MB 9MB
TFT color LCD TFT color LCD
256 colors 16 colors
GT156
8.4" VGA [640 480 dots] 5.7" VGA [640 480 dots] 5.7" QVGA [320 240 dots]
TFT color LCD (High intensity and wide angle view) 65536 colors TFT color LCD
5MB
16 colors
TFT color LCD 65536 colors (High intensity and wide angle view)
GT155
GT1555-QTBD GT1555-QSBD GT1550-QLBD GT1155-QTBDQ GT1155-QTBDA GT1155-QSBD GT1155-QSBDQ GT1155-QSBDA GT1150-QLBD GT1150-QLBDQ GT1150-QLBDA GT1155HS-QSBD GT1150HS-QLBD GT1030-LBD GT1030-LBD2 GT1030-LBDW GT1030-LBDW2 GT1020-LBD GT1020-LBD2 GT1020-LBL GT1020-LBDW GT1020-LBDW2 GT1020-LBLW
24 VDC
9MB
STN color LCD STN monochrome LCD TFT color LCD
4096 colors
Monochrome (white/black) in 16-level
For Q bus connection For A bus connection
GT1155
GT11
256 colors 5.7" QVGA [320 240 dots]

STN color LCD STN monochrome LCD STN color LCD STN monochrome LCD
24 VDC 3MB
For Q bus connection For A bus connection For Q bus connection For A bus connection 3-color LED
For RS-422 connection For RS-232 connection
GT1150
Handy GOT
256 colors
GT1030
4.5" [288
96 dots]
STN monochrome LCD
(green, red, orange) 3-color LED (white, pink, red) 3-color LED (green, red, orange)
24 VDC
1.5MB
For RS-422 connection For RS-232 connection For RS-422 connection For RS-232 connection For RS-422FX connection
GT10
24 VDC 5VDC 512KB
GT1020
3.7" [160
64 dots]
STN monochrome LCD
3-color LED (white, pink, red)
24 VDC 5VDC
For RS-422 connection For RS-232 connection For RS-422FX connection
The GOT model to be used differs depending on the connection type. Series GT11 GT10 Connection type GOT model to be used
RS-232 or RS-422 connections GT115 -Q BD GT115 -Q BDQ, GT115 -Q BDA Bus connection GT1030-LBD2/GT1030-LBDW2, GT1020-LBD2/GT1020-LBDW2 RS-232 connection GT1030-LBD/GT1030-LBDW, GT1020-LBD/GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW RS-422 connection (For GT1020-LBL/GT1020-LBLW, only MELSEC-FXCPU connection is available.)
196

Communication unit
Product name Model
GT15-QBUS GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE GT15-RS2T4-9P GT15-RS2T4-25P GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13 GT15-J61BT13 GT15-J71E71-100
Specifications
Standard model bus connection unit (1ch) for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) Standard model bus connection unit (2ch) for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) Standard model bus connection unit (1ch) for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) Standard model bus connection unit (2ch) for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) Thinned model bus connection unit (1ch) for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) *1 Thinned model bus connection unit (2ch) for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) *1 Thinned model bus connection unit (1ch) for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) *1 Thinned model bus connection unit (2ch) for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) *1 RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male)) RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female)) *2 *2 RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block) RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit RS-422 side connector 9 pins RS-422 side connector 25 pins
Model GT15 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
Bus connection unit
Serial communication unit RS-422 conversion unit MELSECNET/H communication unit

CC-Link communication unit Ethernet communication unit
*3 *3
Optical loop unit Coaxial bus unit Intelligent device station compatible with CC-Link Ver.2 Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T) module
*1: The unit cannot be mounted on other units. *2: The unit cannot be used depending on the connected equipment. Refer to CHAPTER 4 CONNECTION CONFIGURATION and the manual. *3: Not available for GT155 .
Option unit
Product name
Printer unit Video input unit RGB input unit Video/RGB input unit RGB output unit CF card unit CF card extension unit Sound output unit External I/O unit
Model
GT15-PRN GT15V-75V4 GT15V-75R1 GT15V-75V4R1 GT15V-75ROUT GT15-CFCD For NTSC/PAL input 4ch For analog RGB input 1ch
Specifications
USB slave unit (PictBridge) for printer connection 1ch * Dedicated printer connection cable of 3m included

*4
For NTSC/PAL (4ch)/analog RGB (1ch) inputs For analog RGB output
*4 *4
For inserting a CF card (B drive) and removing a CF card from the GOT rear face *5 GT15-CFEX-C08SET For inserting a CF card (B drive) and removing a CF card from the front face of the control panel GT15-SOUT For sound output GT15-DIO For external input and output
*4: Available only for GT1585V and GT1575V *5: The CF card extension unit is a set of a control panel side installation unit, GOT side installation unit and connection cable (0.8m).
Software
Product name
GT Designer2 Version2 GT Works2 Version2 License key for GT SoftGOT1000 *6
Model
SW2D5C-GTD2-E SW2D5C-GTD2-EV SW2D5C-GTWK2-E SW2D5C-GTWK2-EV GT15-SGTKEY-U GT15-SGTKEY-P
Drawing software GT Designer2 Ver.2
Included product Simulator Easy data conversion GT Simulator2 Ver.2 GT Converter2 Ver.2
SoftGOT *6 GT SoftGOT1000 Ver.2
Remarks
English version
Version upgrade software (upgrade GT Designer2 to the latest version) Version upgrade software (upgrade GT Works2 to the latest version) For USB port For parallel port
English version English version English version
*6: The GT SoftGOT1000 license key is required for every personal computer for using GT SoftGOT1000.
197
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
*4
SOFTWARE
GOT

Option
Product name Model
GT15-90XLTT GT15-80SLTT GT15-70SLTT Backlight GT15-70VLTT Backlight
Specifications
For GT1595-XTB For GT1585V-STB
For GT1575-STB For GT1575V-STB GT1575-STB

and GT1585-STB
and
(function version B or earlier) , GT1575-VTB
(function version C or later)
For GT1575-VNB and GT1572-VNB GT15-70VLTN For GT1565-VTB GT15-60VLTT For GT1562-VNB GT15-60VLTN (No add-on memory) GT15-FNB Option function board (No add-on memory) GT15-QFNB * The option function board to be used GT15-QFNB16M differs depending on the GOT main unit + Add-on memory of 16MB Option function board + Add-on memory of 32MB GT15-QFNB32M and functions. For details, refer to "Precautions for + Add-on memory of 48MB GT15-QFNB48M Use" in section 3.2. + Add-on memory of 48MB GT15-MESB48M GT11-50FNB Option function board 5 clear sheets GT15-90PSCB Clear 5 sheets GT15-90PSGB 15" protective sheet Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-90PSCW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-90PSGW 5 clear sheets GT15-80PSCB Clear 5 sheets 12.1" protective sheet GT15-80PSGB Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-80PSCW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-80PSGW 5 clear sheets GT15-70PSCB Clear 5 sheets 10.4" protective sheet GT15-70PSGB Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-70PSCW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-70PSGW 5 clear sheets GT15-60PSCB Clear 5 sheets 8.4" protective sheet GT15-60PSGB Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-60PSCW Protective sheet Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-60PSGW 5 clear sheets GT15-50PSCB Clear 5 sheets 5.7" protective sheet (For GT15) GT15-50PSGB Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-50PSCW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT15-50PSGW 5 clear sheets GT11-50PSCB Clear 5 sheets 5.7" protective sheet (For GT11) GT11-50PSGB Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT11-50PSCW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT11-50PSGW 5.7" protective sheet (For handy GOT) 5 clear sheets GT11H-50PSC Clear 5 sheets GT10-30PSGB 5 clear sheets GT10-30PSCB 4.5" protective sheet (For GT1030) Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT10-30PSGW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT10-30PSCW Clear 5 sheets GT10-20PSGB 5 clear sheets GT10-20PSCB 3.7" protective sheet (For GT1020) Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT10-20PSGW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets GT10-20PSCW USB environmental Environmental cover for USB interface For 15"/12.1"/10.4"/8.4" GT15-UCOV protection cover on the GOT main unit front side (as a replacement) For 5.7" GT11-50UCOV Emergency stop SW guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV For preventing misoperation of emergency stop switch Stand for 15" GT15-90STAND Stand Stand for 12.1" GT15-80STAND Stand for 8.4" and 10.4" GT15-70STAND Stand for 5.7" GT05-50STAND Flash ROM of 32MB GT05-MEM-32MC CF card Flash ROM of 64MB GT05-MEM-64MC GT05-MEM-128MC Flash ROM of 128MB GT05-MEM-256MC Flash ROM of 256MB Memory card adaptor For conversion from CF card to memory card (TYPE ) GT05-MEM-ADPC
A870GOT-SWS A870GOT-TWS A8GT-70GOT-TW A8GT-70GOT-TB A8GT-70GOT-SW A8GT-70GOT-SB A870GOT-EWS A8GT-70GOT-EW A8GT-70GOT-EB A77GOT-EL-S5 A77GOT-EL-S3 A77GOT-EL A960GOT A97 GOT A77GOT-CL-S5 A77GOT-CL-S3 A77GOT-CL A77GOT-L-S5 A77GOT-L-S3 A77GOT-L A85 GOT
*1
GT15-70ATT-87
For 10.4" attachment
GT157
GT15-60ATT-87
Attachment GT15-60ATT-96 GT15-60ATT-97 For 8.4" attachment
GT156
GT15-60ATT-77
GT15-50ATT-85
For 5.7" attachment
GT155 GT115
*2
Battery
*1: GT115 -Q BDQ and GT115 *2: Available only for GT1030
GT15-BAT GT11-50BAT
-Q BDA are excluded.
Battery for clock data and maintenance report data backups Replacement battery for clock data, alarm history and recipe data
198

Related Manuals
Manual Name
GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (For GOT1000 Series) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual GT15 User's Manual GT11 User's Manual Handy GOT User's Manual GT10 User's Manual GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual GT Simulator2 Version2 Operating Manual GT Converter2 Version2 Operating Manual
Description
Describes methods of the GT Designer2 installation operation, basic operation for drawing and transferring data to GOT1000 series. Describes specifications and settings of the object functions used in GOT1000 series.
Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable creation method.
Model code
1D7M13 1D7M14 1D7M15 1D7M35 1D7M53 1D7M12 09R814 09R816 09R818 1D7M46 1D7M37 1D7M16
Describes extended functions and option functions applicable to GOT series. Describes specifications, system configurations and setting method of the gateway function.
Describes the specifications, system configurations, and setting method of the MES interface function.
Describes the GT15 hardware-relevant content such as part names, external dimensions, mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option equipment. Describes the GT11 hardware-relevant content such as part names, external dimensions, mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option equipment.
Describes the Handy GOT hardware-relevant content such as part names, external dimensions, mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option equipment.
mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option equipment. Describes the screen configuration, functions and using method of GT SoftGOT1000. Describes the system configuration, operation method, and others of GT Simulator2. Describes the operation method and others of GT Converter2.
Cable
Product name
QCPU extension cable GOT-to-GOT connection Q bus connection cable cable (For QCPU (Q mode)) QCPU long distance connection cable
Model
GT15-QC06B GT15-QC12B GT15-QC30B GT15-QC50B GT15-QC100B GT15-QC150BS GT15-QC200BS
Cable length
0.6m 1.2m 3m 5m 10m 15m 20m 25m 30m 35m
Recommended Product
*1
Application
Model
*3
GT15 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting GOT and GOT
GOT-to-GOT long distance GT15-QC250BS GT15-QC300BS connection cable GT15-QC350BS Bus extension connector box A9GT-QCNB GT15-C12NB GT15-C30NB GT15-C50NB GT15-AC06B Large-size CPU extension GT15-AC12B GT15-AC30B cable GT15-AC50B GT15-A370C12B-S1 GT15-A370C25B-S1 GT15-A370C12B GT15-A370C25B GT15-A1SC07B A bus connection Small-size CPU extension GT15-A1SC12B cable GT15-A1SC30B cable (For QnA/ACPU /Motion controller CPU (A series)) GT15-A1SC50B GT15-A1SC05NB Small-size CPU extension GT15-A1SC07NB GT15-A1SC30NB cable GT15-A1SC50NB GT15-C100EXSS-1 Small-size CPU long distance connection cable GT15-C200EXSS-1 GT15-C300EXSS-1 GT15-C07BS GOT-to-GOT connection cable GT15-C12BS GT15-C30BS GT15-C50BS GOT-to-GOT long distance GT15-C100BS GT15-C200BS connection cable GT15-C300BS A0J2HCPU connection cable GT15-J2C10B Bus connector conversion box Buffer circuit cable A7GT-CNB GT15-EXCNB GT01-C30R4-25P QnA/A/FXCPU direct connection cable Computer link connection cable RS-422 cable GT01-C100R4-25P GT01-C200R4-25P GT01-C300R4-25P GT10-C30R4-25P GT10-C100R4-25P GT10-C200R4-25P
GT10-C300R4-25P
For long distance connection (13.2m or more) of QCPU and GOT (A9GT-QCNB is necessary) For long distance connection of GOT and GOT For QCPU long distance (13.2m or more) bus connection
1.2m 3m 5m 0.6m 1.2m 3m 5m 1.2m 2.5m 1.2m 2.5m 0.7m 1.2m 3m 5m 0.45m 0.7m 3m 5m 10.6m 20.6m 30.6m 0.7m 1.2m 3m 5m 10m 20m 30m 1m 0.5m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m
For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series, extension base unit) and A7GT-CNB For connecting motion controller CPU (A series, main base unit) and GOT For connecting motion controller CPU (A series, main base unit) and A7GT-CNB For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) and GOT For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU and GOT For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) and A7GT-CNB For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU and A7GT-CNB
For long distance connection of QnAS/AnSCPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) and GOT For long distance connection of A7GT-CNB and GOT * Combined product of the GT15-EXCNB and GT15-C BS
For connecting GOT and GOT

For connecting A0J2HCPU power supply module (A0J2-PW) and GOT
For QnA/ACPU long distance bus connection

Combined with GT15-C BS, can be used asGT15-C EXSS-1
For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series)/FXCPU (D-sub 9-pin connector) and GOT For connecting FA-CNVdrsquareCBL and GOT For connecting serial communication module and GOT For connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3 and GOT For connecting QnA/FXPU (D-sub 25-pin connector) and GOT For connecting serial communication module (AJ71QC24(N)-R4)and GOT
*2
Computer link connection cable
GT09-C30R4-6C GT09-C100R4-6C GT09-C200R4-6C GT09-C300R4-6C
For connecting serial communication module and GOT For connecting computer link module and GOT
*1: Purchase Recommended Products from Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *2: Available for use when the Handy GOT connector conversion box is used. *3: Available connection type and cables differ depending on the GOT main unit.For details, refer to "CHAPTER 4 CONNECTION CONFIGURATION"(page 67) or "GOT1000 Series Connection Manual".
199
GLOSSARY
For connecting GOT and GOT
For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series, extension base unit) and GOT
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
Describes the GT10 hardware-relevant content such as part names, external dimensions,
GOT
1D7M36

Cable
Product name Model
GT01-C10R4-8P GT01-C30R4-8P GT01-C100R4-8P GT01-C200R4-8P RS-422 cable
FXCPU direct connection cable FX communication function
Cable length
1m 3m 10m 20m 30m 1m 3m 10m 20m 30m
Recommended Product
*1
Application
Model *2 GT15 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
GT01-C300R4-8P GT10-C10R4-8P GT10-C100R4-8P GT10-C200R4-8P GT10-C300R4-8P GT01-C30R2-6P
For connecting FXCPU (Mini DIN 8-pin connector) and GOT For connecting FXCPU communication function extension board and GOT
extension board connection cable GT10-C30R4-8P
For connecting QCPU and GOT 3m

QCPU direct connection cable Data transfer cable
For connecting personal computer (Drawing software) (D-sub 25-pin: female) and GOT (mini DIN 6-pin: female) For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting GOT and GOT Connecting Handy GOT connector conversion box and QCPU For connecting FXCPU communication function extension board (D-sub 9-pin connector) and GOT For connecting FXCPU communication function adapter (D-sub 9-pin connector) and GOT For connecting personal computer (Drawing software) (D-sub 9-pin: female) and GOT (D-sub 9-pin: female) For connecting FXCPU communication function adapter (D-sub 25-pin connector) and GOT
GT10-C30R2-6P GT11H-C30R2-6P
3m 3m
FX communication function
RS-232 cable
extension board connection cable, FX communication function adapter connection cable, data transfer cable FX communication function adapter connection cable, data transfer cable Computer link connection cable
GT01-C30R2-9S
3m
GT01-C30R2-25P
3m
For connecting personal computer (Drawing software) (D-sub 25-pin: male) and GOT (D-sub 9-pin: female) For connecting serial communication module and GOT For connecting computer link module and GOT
For converting D-sub 37-pin connector to terminal block and D-sub 9-pin connector
GT09-C30R2-9P GT09-C30R2-25P GT11H-CNB-37S GT11H-C30-37P
3m 3m 3m 6m 10m 3m 6m 10m 1.5m 1.5m 1.5m
Connector conversion box for Handy GOT
GT11H-C60-37P FA-equipment/power supply/ GT11H-C100-37P connection cable operation switch GT11H-C30 connection cable GT11H-C60 External GT11H-C100 RS-422/power supply/ operation switch connection cable
RS-232/power supply/ operation switch connection cable
For connecting FA-equipment relay cable and GOT
For connecting FA-equipment/power supply/operation switch and GOT For connecting FXCPU and GOT
GT11H-C15R4-8P GT11H-C15R4-25P GT11H-C15R2-6P GT10-RS2TUSB-5S GT09-C30USB-5P
For connecting power supply/operation switch and GOT For connecting A/QnACPU and GOT For connecting power supply/operation switch and GOT For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting power supply/operation switch and GOT For connecting personal computer (USB) and GOT (RS-232)
(Use GT09-C30USB-5P for connection between adapter and personal computer)
FA-equipment relay cable
RS-232/USB conversion adapter for data transfer USB cable Data transfer cable
3m
For connecting personal computer (USB) and GOT (RS-232) For connecting printer and GOT (printer unit)
*1: Purchase Recommended Products from Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *2: Available connection type and cables differ depending on the GOT main unit.For details, refer to "CHAPTER 4 CONNECTION CONFIGURATION"(page 67) or "GOT1000 Series Connection Manual".
Connection cable for third party programmable controller

Product name Model
Cable length
3m
Recommended Product
*1
Equipment connected to GOT

Programmable controller CPU: CQM1/CQM1H/CS1/CJ1/CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1 Serial communication module: CS1W-SCU21/CJ1W-SCU41 Communication board: C200HW-COM02/COM05/COM06 Serial communication module: CQM1-SCB41/CS1W-SCB41/CS1W-SCB21
Model *3 GT15 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
Connection cable for GT09-C30R20101-9P OMRON programmable controller GT09-C30R20102-25S GT09-C30R20103-25P GT09-C30R21101-6P Connection cable for GT09-C30R21102-9S KEYENCE programmable controller GT09-C30R21103-3T Connection cable for GT09-C30R20601-15P SHARP programmable GT09-C30R20602-15P controller
Connection cable for JTEKT programmable controller Connection cable for TOSHIBA programmable controller
3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m 3m
Connection cable: CQM1-CIF01 Rack type host link unit: C500H-LK201-V1 Programmable controller CPU: KV-700/1000 Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/L20R port 1 Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/L20R port 2 Programmable controller CPU: JW-22CU/70CUH/100CUH/100CU Programmable controller CPU: JW-32CUH/33CUH RS232 to RS422 converter: TXU-2051 Programmable controller CPU: T2E Programmable controller CPU: T2N Programmable controller CPU: H-4010/H series board type/EH-150 series Intelligent serial port module: COMM-H/COMM-2H Programmable controller CPU: H-4010/EH-150 series RS422 to 232 conversion adapter: AFP8550 Programmable controller CPU: FP2/FP2SH/FP10(S)/FP10SH/FP-M Computer communication unit: AFP2462/AFP3462/AFP5462 Programmable controller CPU: FP1-C24C/C40C Programmable controller CPU: FP1-C16CT/C32CT Programmable controller CPU: PROGIC-8/MP-920/MP-930 Programmable controller CPU: PROGIC-8
Programmable controller CPU: CP-9300MS MEMOBUS module: CP-217F (when connected to CN1)
GT09-C30R21201-25P GT09-C30R20501-9P GT09-C30R20502-15P
RS-232 cable
Connection cable for GT09-C30R20401-15P HITACHI programmable GT09-C30R20402-15P controller GT09-C30R20901-25P Connection cable for GT09-C30R20902-9P MATSUSHITA programmable controller GT09-C30R20903-9P GT09-C30R20904-3C GT09-C30R20201-9P GT09-C30R20202-15P Connection cable for GT09-C30R20203-9P YASKAWA GT09-C30R20204-14P programmable controller GT09-C30R20205-25P Connection cable for GT09-C30R20301-9P YOKOGAWA GT09-C30R20302-9P programmable controller
Connection cable for ALLEN-BRADLEY programmable controller Connection cable for SIEMENS programmable controller
*2
Programmable controller CPU: MP-940 MEMOBUS module: CP-217IF (when connected to CN2) YOKOGAWA PC link module: LC01-0N/LC02-0N CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin conversion cable: KM10-0C
PC link module: F3LC11-1N/F3LC11-1F/F3LC12-1F/F3LC11-2N Programmable controller CPU: NFCP100/NFJT100 Programmable controller CPU: SL500 series Converter: 1761-NET-AIC
GT09-C30R20701-9S GT09-C30R20801-9S
HMI adapter
200

Connection cable for third party programmable controller
Product name Model
Cable length
3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m 3m 10m 20m 30m
Recommended Product *1
Equipment connected to GOT

Programmable controller CPU: CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1 Serial communication module: CJ1W-SCU41 Serial communication module: CQM1-SCB41/CS1W-SCB41 Rack type host link unit: C200H-LK202-V1/C500H-LK201-V1 Communication board: C200HW-COM03/COM06
Model
*3
GT15 GT11 Handy GOT GT10
GT09-C30R40101-9P GT09-C100R40101-9P GT09-C200R40101-9P GT09-C300R40101-9P Connection cable for GT09-C30R40102-9P OMRON programmable GT09-C100R40102-9P controller GT09-C200R40102-9P GT09-C300R40102-9P GT09-C30R41101-5T Connection cable for GT09-C100R41101-5T KEYENCE programmable GT09-C200R41101-5T controller GT09-C300R41101-5T GT09-C30R40601-15P GT09-C100R40601-15P GT09-C200R40601-15P GT09-C300R40601-15P GT09-C30R40602-15P Connection cable for GT09-C100R40602-15P SHARP programmable GT09-C200R40602-15P controller GT09-C300R40602-15P GT09-C30R40603-6T GT09-C100R40603-6T GT09-C200R40603-6T GT09-C300R40603-6T GT09-C30R41201-6C Connection cable for GT09-C100R41201-6C JTEKT programmable GT09-C200R41201-6C controller GT09-C300R41201-6C RS-422 cable Connection cable for TOSHIBA programmable controller GT09-C30R40501-15P GT09-C100R40501-15P GT09-C200R40501-15P GT09-C300R40501-15P GT09-C30R40502-6C GT09-C100R40502-6C GT09-C200R40502-6C GT09-C300R40502-6C GT09-C30R40503-15P GT09-C100R40503-15P GT09-C200R40503-15P GT09-C300R40503-15P GT09-C30R40401-7T GT09-C100R40401-7T GT09-C200R40401-7T GT09-C300R40401-7T GT09-C30R40201-9P GT09-C100R40201-9P GT09-C200R40201-9P GT09-C300R40201-9P GT09-C30R40202-14P GT09-C100R40202-14P GT09-C200R40202-14P GT09-C300R40202-14P GT09-C30R40301-6T GT09-C100R40301-6T GT09-C200R40301-6T GT09-C300R40301-6T GT09-C30R40302-6T GT09-C100R40302-6T GT09-C200R40302-6T GT09-C300R40302-6T
Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/L20R port 2
Programmable controller CPU: JW-22CU/70CUH/100CUH/100CU
Programmable controller CPU: JW-32CUH/33CUH
Link unit: JW-21CM/10CM/ZW-10CM
Programmable controller CPU: PC3J/PC3JL Communication module: PC/CMP2-LINK
Programmable controller CPU: T2/T3/T3H/model3000(S3)
Programmable controller CPU: T2E/model2000(S2)
Programmable controller CPU: T2N
Intelligent serial port module: COMM-H/COMM-2H
MEMOBUS module: JAMSC-120NOM27100/JAMSC-IF612
Connection cable for YASKAWA programmable controller
Programmable controller CPU: MP940
PC link module: LC02-0N
*1: Purchase Recommended Products from Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. *2: RS-422 cables of 10m or less and RS-232 cables of 3m or less can be used when the connector conversion box for the Handy GOT is used. *3: Available connection type and cables differ depending on the GOT main unit.For details, refer to "GOT1000 Series Connection Manual".
201
GLOSSARY
Connection cable for YOKOGAWA programmable controller
PC link module: F3LC11-2N
Connection cable for HITACHI programmable controller
FUNCTION
*2
SOFTWARE
GOT

MEMO
202
7. GLOSSARY
This chapter describes glossaries related to the GOT.
7. GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
203
7. GLOSSARY
Item Description Connection to the CC-Link network system CC-Link (Control & Communication Link) is a high-performance FA field network. With CC-Link, a large quantity of ON/OFF information as bit data and numerical information as word data can be sent at 10Mbps of the highest communication speed in the industry. Abbreviation for CompactFlash Card CompactFlash is the memory card standard suggested by SanDisk Corporation. A CF card consists of the flash memory that data are not deleted without energization and the control circuit for the external I/O. The GOT can communicate with a programmable controller and each module with connecting the GOT to the interface of the programmable controller CPU module. Software for GOT1000 series Software for creating data for the document display function of GT Designer2 Connection with the standard network communication method (Ethernet) with personal computers and workstations Devices used in the GOT The GOT internal devices include word devices for numerical information and bit devices for ON/OFF information. Software for converting the project data created with the GOT800 series drawing software and with the screen editor software manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation into data applicable to GT Designer2 Software for creating the screen for GOT1000 series and GOT900 series Software for simulating operations of the GOT-A900 series and GOT1000 series on a personal computer with connecting the GOT to GX Simulator and a programmable controller CPU Software for using a personal computer as the GOT1000 series Software for using a personal computer as the GOT-A900 series Connection to one of the MELSEC (name for the networks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation) network systems The high-speed communication of 10 Mbps is available. Connection to the control network system (MELSECNET/H) among manufacturing equipment Data directly related to operations of mechanical equipment can be communicated among control equipment in real time with the high-speed communication and largecapacity link devices. MES is an abbreviation for Manufacturing Execution Systems. The system controls and monitors the status of factories in real time for optimizing production activities. DB Connection Service is software. The MES interface function for the GOT can be used with installing the software on the server computer. STN is an abbreviation for Super Twisted Nematic. The 256-color, monochrome with 16 shades of gray (white/black), and monochrome (white/black) displays are available for GOT1000 series. TFT is an abbreviation for Thin Film Transistor. The 256-color and 65536-color displays are available for GOT1000 series. Screen displayed on the base screen A created window screen is displayed as an overlap window, a superimpose window, a key window, or a dialog window. Window that pops up on the base screen The window can be manually moved or closed. Up to two windows can be simultaneously displayed. For GOT1000 series, the GOT functions are enabled with setting figures, including switches, lamps, and display panes for the numeric display, and with assigning devices (bit and word) and operation functions to the figures on GT Designer2. Object is a generic term for the figures. (Continued to next page)
CC-Link connection
CF card
Direct CPU connection Document Converter Ethernet connection GOT internal devices
GT Converter2 GT Designer2 GT Simulator2 GT SoftGOT1000 GT SoftGOT2 MELSECNET/10 connection
MELSECNET/H connection
MES DB Connection Service
STN TFT Window screen
Overlap window
Object
204
1. GLOSSARY
Item Option OS Option units Extended function OS Extension unit Screen switching Description OS to be installed on the GOT for using the option functions For using the option functions, an option function board is separately required. Extension units to be installed on the extension unit interfaces of the GOT excluding the communication units OS to be installed on the GOT for using the extended functions Generic term for the option units and communication units Function for switching between base screens and window screens of the GOT The screen switching is enabled with screen switching devices (word devices). Window that pops up on the base screen for input operations, including the numerical input The key window is divided into two types. One is preinstalled in the GOT, and the other is created by the user. OS to be installed on the GOT for starting the GOT Term for MITSUBISHI human machine interface Graphic Operation Terminal is abbreviated to GOT. Character string registered by the user on GT Designer Comments can be displayed with the multiple object functions when the comments are resistered as the basic comment or the comment group in advance. Function of the GOT that devices of a programmable controller CPU and the buffer memory of an intelligent function module can be monitored or tested Window composited on the base screen When a superimpose window is switched, a part of the base screen can be changed. Up to two windows can be simultaneously displayed. Window displayed on the top of all screens The window can be used to indicate an error and warning for the system. The window can also be used instead of system messages displayed on the GOT. OS to be installed on the GOT for communicating with controllers, including a programmable controller CPU The communication driver dedicated to each connection type (bus connection, direct CPU connection, and others) is required. Extension unit to be installed on the extension unit interfaces of the GOT for communicating with controllers, including a programmable controller CPU One of the electrical cables The cable is covered with an insulator and the covered cable is shielded for effectively transmitting high-frequency signals. A bus is a transmission path that enables a programmeble controller CPU to communicate with the other modules. The bus connection is that the GOT is connected to the bus. Cable for transmitting optical signals The programmable controller is activated by an electrical signal. The electrical signal of ON/OFF is converted to the optical signal to send the optical signal via a fiber-optic cable. When receiving the signal, the signal is converted to the electrical signal. Figures registered as parts Parts are used for the parts display and parts movement. Figures that can be registered as parts include character and image data. Memory that stored data are not deleted without energization A group of all the information to be displayed on a GOT A project consists of the screen information, parts information, and others. The information (project) is created as one file. The basic screen for the GOT screen display Screen data can be stored in a memory card with a GOT, and the data can be used with the other GOTs. The memory card includes the CF card. Function for changing a sequence program in the list program format (instruction word) with the GOT Programs can be edited on the scene immediately. Screen for creating formats to be output with the report function
Key window Standard monitor OS Graphic Operation Terminal Comment System monitor Superimpose window
Dialog window
Communication driver
Communication unit Coaxial cable
Bus connection
Fiber-optic cable
Parts Flash memory Project (file) Base screen Memory card List editor Report screen
205
GLOSSARY
FUNCTION
SOFTWARE
GOT
1. GLOSSARY
MEMO
206
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]

(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product. (2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases. 1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design. 2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided. 4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced. 5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. 6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault. (2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications. In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications. However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at our discretion.
Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

GOT1000 Handbook

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GOT1000 Handbook

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

INTRODUCTION

HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK

Manuals related to the GOT1000 series

For details about the GOT hardware

For details about the connection configurations and cable fabrication

For details about the extended functions and option functions

NEWLY ADDED FUNCTIONS

Connection to PC CPU modules

New optional units

GOT enhanced by new functions

The set value, Torque 3, is not operable.

Alarm detected by status observation!

Sequence program, etc.

Sequence program, etc.

2) Analysis and correction

CPU direct connection

Expanded manufacturers and models of controllers

5 COMPLIANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS 6 EQUIPMENT, SOFTWARE, AND MANUALS 7 GLOSSARY

189 195 203

(High intensity and wide angle view)

(High intensity and wide angle view)

(High intensity and wide angle view)

GT1595-XTBA AC type GT1595-XTBD DC type

GT1585V-STBA AC type GT1585V-STBD DC type

GT1585-STBA AC type GT1585-STBD DC type

Resolution: XGA 1024 768 Display color: 65536 colors

Resolution: SVGA 800 600 Display color: 65536 colors

(High intensity and wide angle view)

GT1575V-STBA AC type GT1575V-STBD DC type

TFT (High intensity and

(High intensity and wide angle view)

GT1575-VTBA AC type GT1575-VTBD DC type

Resolution: SVGA 800 600 Display color: 65536 colors

Resolution: VGA 640 480 Display color: 65536 colors

Resolution: VGA 640 480 Display color: 256 colors

Resolution: VGA 640 480 Display color: 16 colors

1.1 Product Lineup

(High intensity and wide angle view)

GT1565-VTBA AC type GT1565-VTBD DC type

Resolution: VGA 640 480 Display color: 65536 colors

Resolution: VGA 640 480 Display color: 16 colors

(High intensity and wide angle view)

(High intensity and wide angle view)

Resolution: VGA 640 480 Display color: 65536 colors

Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: 65536 colors

Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: 4096 colors

Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: Monochrome in 16-level

1.1 Product Lineup

EQUIPMENT, SOFTWARE, AND MANUALS

CONFORMANCE WITH OVERSEAS STANDARDS

Standard model GT11

Q bus GT1155-QTBDQ DC type connection*1 A bus *2 GT1155-QTBDA DC type connection

Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: 256 colors

Q bus *1 GT1155-QSBDQ DC type connection A bus GT1155-QSBDA DC type connection*2

Q bus GT1150-QLBDQ DC type connection *1 A bus GT1150-QLBDA DC type connection *2

Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: 256 colors

Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: Monochrome in 16-level

Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: 256 colors

Resolution: QVGA 320 240 Display color: Monochrome in 16-level

1.1 Product Lineup

24VDC type RS-422 connection GT1030-LBD2 24VDC type RS-232 connection

24VDC type RS-422 connection

1.1 Product Lineup

Use a personal computer as a GOT

Q bus GT1155-QTBDQ DC type connection1 A bus 2 GT1155-QTBDA DC type connection

Q bus 1 GT1155-QSBDQ DC type connection A bus GT1155-QSBDA DC type connection2

Q bus GT1150-QLBDQ DC type connection 1 A bus GT1150-QLBDA DC type connection 2

GT Designer2 Version 25 GT Simulator2 Version 25